Cadillac - DeVille - Owners Manual - 2005 - 2005 (2)

2005 Cadillac DeVille Owner Manual Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1 Front Seats ............................................... 1-2 Rear Seats ............................................... 1-5 Safety Belts .............................................. 1-7 Child Restraints ....................................... 1-26 Airbag System ......................................... 1-45 Restraint System Check ............................ 1-54 Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Keys ........................................................ 2-3 Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-8 Windows ................................................. 2-15 Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-19 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-24 Mirrors .................................................... 2-37 OnStar® System ...................................... 2-42 HomeLink® Transmitter ............................. 2-44 Storage Areas ......................................... 2-48 Sunroof .................................................. 2-51 Vehicle Personalization ............................. 2-52 Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4 Climate Controls ...................................... 3-30 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-40 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-57 M Trip Computer ......................................... 3-79 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-79 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2 Towing ................................................... 4-35 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1 Service ..................................................... 5-3 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10 Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-48 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-51 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-56 Tires ...................................................... 5-57 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-87 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-96 Electrical System ...................................... 5-97 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-106 ..................................... 6-1 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2 Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10 Index ................................................................ 1 Canadian Owners A French language copy of this manual can be obtained from your dealer or from: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crest & Wreath, and the name DEVILLE are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division whenever it appears in this manual. Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is needed while your are on the road. If the vehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle. Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 05DEVILLE A First Edition ii How to Use This Manual Many people read the owner manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn about the features and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work together in the owner manual to explain things. Index A good place to quickly locate information about the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. © 2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Safety Warnings and Symbols There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning. {CAUTION: These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not, you or others could be hurt. You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Do Not,” “Do Not do this” or “Do Not let this happen.” iii Vehicle Damage Warnings Vehicle Symbols Also, in this manual you will find these notices: The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gage, or indicator. Notice: These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle. A notice tells about something that can damage the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage. When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words. There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE. iv If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component, gage, or indicator, reference the following topics: • • • • • • • Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1 Features and Controls in Section 2 Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 Climate Controls in Section 3 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3 Audio System(s) in Section 3 Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5 These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle: v ✍ NOTES vi Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems Front Seats ......................................................1-2 Power Seats ..................................................1-2 Power Lumbar ...............................................1-2 Massaging Lumbar .........................................1-3 Heated and Cooled Seats ................................1-3 Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4 Rear Seats .......................................................1-5 Heated Seats .................................................1-5 Power Lumbar ...............................................1-6 Safety Belts .....................................................1-7 Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-7 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-11 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-12 Driver Position ..............................................1-12 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-18 Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-19 Center Front Passenger Position .....................1-19 Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-20 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults .......................................1-23 Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-25 Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-25 Child Restraints .............................................1-26 Older Children ..............................................1-26 Infants and Young Children ............................1-28 Child Restraint Systems .................................1-31 Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-34 Top Strap ....................................................1-35 Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-37 Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-37 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System .........................................1-39 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position ...................................................1-40 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position ............................................1-42 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ............................................1-42 Airbag System ...............................................1-45 Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-48 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-50 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-52 How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-52 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-52 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-54 Restraint System Check ..................................1-54 Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-54 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash ...................................................1-55 1-1 Front Seats Power Lumbar Power Seats The power seat controls are located on the outboard sides of the front seat cushions. If your vehicle has this feature, the controls are located on the outboard sides of the front seats. Use the power seat controls first to get the proper position, then continue with the lumbar adjustment. • Move the front of the seat control up or down to adjust the front portion of the cushion. • Move the rear of the seat control up or down to adjust the rear portion of the cushion. • Lift up or push down on the center of the seat control to move the entire seat up or down. • Slide the seat control forward or rearward to move the entire seat forward or rearward. 1-2 Press the lumbar control forward to increase support and rearward to decrease support. Press the control up or down to raise or lower the support mechanism. Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it may during long trips, so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed. Massaging Lumbar If your vehicle has this feature, the control is located on the outboard sides of the front seats. With the ignition on, briefly press the top of the control where it is marked AUTO to activate the massaging lumbar feature. The massage cycle will run continuously for up to 10 minutes and can be interrupted by briefly pressing the bottom of the control. The lumbar support can be adjusted during the massage cycle by moving the control forward to increase support and rearward to decrease support. The massage cycle will continue to run even if the ignition is turned to OFF unless interrupted. If your vehicle has this feature, it will not have the adaptive seat feature. Heated and Cooled Seats Your vehicle may have heated and cooled front seats. The buttons are located on the front seat armrests. I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the heated seatback. J(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to turn on the heated seat and seatback. H(Cooled Seat): Press this button to turn on the cooled seat. Press the button to turn on the feature that you want. A light on the button will display to show which feature is on. There are three temperature ranges for each feature. A light bar near the buttons will display which setting the feature is in; high, medium or low. The longest bar shows the high range and the shortest bar shows the low range. 1-3 When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the highest setting. Each time you press the button, the feature will go down one temperature setting. To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until the display lights turn off. Reclining Seatbacks The recliner controls are located on the outboard sides of the front seats. But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. Press the recliner control forward or rearward to adjust the seatback forward or rearward. 1-4 Rear Seats {CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can not do their job when you are reclined like this. Heated Seats Your vehicle may have heated rear seats. The buttons are located on the rear seat armrests. The shoulder belt can not do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt can not do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn on the heated seatback. 1-5 J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this button to turn on the heated seat and seatback. Press the button to turn on the feature that you want. A light on the button will display to show which feature is on. There are three temperature ranges for each feature. A light bar near the buttons will display which setting the feature is in; high, medium or low. The longest bar shows the high range and the shortest bar shows the low range. Power Lumbar Your vehicle may be equipped with four-way lumbar support, without the massage feature, for the outboard rear seating positions. The rear lumbar support controls are located on the rear door trim panels. When you press a button, the feature will turn on at the highest setting. Each time you press the button, the feature will go down one temperature setting. To turn the feature off, keep pressing the button until the display lights turn off. To activate the rear lumbar support feature, push forward on the control to increase support or rearward to decrease support. The lumbar control can also be moved up and down to adjust the location of the support. 1-6 Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts. {CAUTION: Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too. {CAUTION: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly. Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-45. In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work. 1-7 You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one. A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed. Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter...a lot! Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. 1-8 Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. 1-9 The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 1-10 or the instrument panel... Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. 1-11 Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from Driver Position home, why should I wear safety belts? A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an accident — even one that is not your fault — you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver does not protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers. Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h). Safety belts are for everyone. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This part is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-26 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-28. Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. First, you will want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has. We will start with the driver position. 1-12 Lap-Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear it properly. 1. Close and lock the door. 2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. 3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Be sure to use the correct buckle when buckling your lap-shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the buckle for the center passenger position. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-25. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the safety belt very quickly out of the retractor. 1-13 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. 1-14 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place. 1-15 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. 1-16 Q: What is wrong with this? {CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it. A: The belt is twisted across the body. 1-17 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. The belt should go back out of the way. Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. 1-18 Right Front Passenger Position Center Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-12. Lap Belt The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again. If your vehicle has a front bench seat, someone can sit in the center position. When you sit in the center front seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt. 1-19 Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Lap-Shoulder Belt All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is how to wear one properly. To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-25. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. 1-20 The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. The latch plates for the safety belts in each rear seating position vary in size. If the center rear or the left rear latch plate is inserted into the incorrect buckle, the plate will not latch properly. Be sure you are using the correct buckle and that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-25. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it. 1-21 {CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. 1-22 To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle. Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt: Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt away from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. 1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the top of the seatback. 1-23 2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 1-24 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. They are on the buckle end of the safety belts for the driver and right front passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crash. Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-55. Safety Belt Extender 4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-20. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guides. Slide the guide into its storage pocket on the top of the seatback. If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. 1-25 Child Restraints Older Children Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: If possible, an older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly. Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. 1-26 Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck? A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window, move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position, move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults on page 1-23. {CAUTION: Never do this. Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can not properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time. 1-27 The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. {CAUTION: Never do this. Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. 1-28 Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need to use a child restraint. {CAUTION: {CAUTION: People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby should be secured in an appropriate restraint. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. 1-29 Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? {CAUTION: A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs. 1-30 Newborn infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints. Child Restraint Systems {CAUTION: The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom the safety belts are designed. A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young children always should be secured in appropriate child restraints. An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle. 1-31 A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. 1-32 A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields. Q: How do child restraints work? A: A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position children. A built-in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a portable one, which is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. For many years, add-on child restraints have used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness system holds the child in place within the restraint. A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. One system, the three-point harness, has straps that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side. 1-33 When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We, therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. 1-34 Here is why: {CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Top Strap {CAUTION: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision. For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are designed for use with or without the top strap being anchored. Others require the top strap always to be anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is anchored properly. If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is in it. 1-35 {CAUTION: Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor only one child restraint. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single bracket could cause the anchor to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured if this happens. To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle, attach only one child restraint per bracket. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top strap under it. 1-36 Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions say. Top Strap Anchor Location Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for the rear seating positions. You will find them behind the rear seat on the filler panel. Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the right front passenger’s position if a national or local law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top strap in this position. Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find anchors in all three rear seating positions. This system, designed to make installation of child restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether strap. In order to get to a bracket, you will have to open the trim cover. 1-37 A. Lower Anchorage B. Lower Anchorage C. Top Tether A. Lower Anchorage B. Lower Anchorage In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint designed for that system. To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH system has a label on the seatback at each lower anchor position. 1-38 The labels are located near the base of all three rear seating positions. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System 1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating position you want to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion. See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-37. 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. {CAUTION: If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to its anchorage points, the restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly installed using the anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. 3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-35. 5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top tether from the top tether anchorage and then disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH anchorages. 1-39 Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-37. See Top Strap on page 1-35 if the child restraint has one. {CAUTION: If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 1-40 3. Buckle the belt. Be sure the latch plate clicks when you put it into the buckle. This means you are using the correct buckle. Also make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-41 Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position {CAUTION: If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-37. A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat. There is no top strap anchor in the right front passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-35, if the child restraint has one. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Do not secure a child restraint in the center front seat position. 1-42 Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why: {CAUTION: 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. 1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward-facing child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-2. 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to. 1-43 5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger. 1-44 Airbag System Your vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for the driver and another frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle also has a side impact airbag for the driver and another side impact airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle may also have a side impact airbag for each of the two rear seat outboard passenger positions. If your vehicle has side impact airbags for each of the two rear seat outboard passenger positions, it will say AIR BAG on each side of the rear seatback closest to the door. Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag. But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations. 1-45 CAUTION: {CAUTION: You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt, even if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them. Frontal airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy only in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past. Side impact airbags are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle. CAUTION: 1-46 (Continued) (Continued) They are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person. {CAUTION: Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag, as you would be if you were leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag inflation before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt even with frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door. {CAUTION: Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 1-26 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-28. United States Canada There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows the words AIR BAG or an airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-45 for more information. 1-47 Where Are the Airbags? The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel. 1-48 The driver’s side impact airbag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door. The right front passenger’s side impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door. 1-49 {CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact airbag. The side impact airbags for the rear seat outboard passenger positions are in the sides of the rear seatback closest to the doors. 1-50 When Should an Airbag Inflate? The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down. In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags, which adjust the restraint according to crash severity. Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 10 to 16 mph (18 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h). (The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range.) Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For example: • If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the object were moving. • If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the object does not deform. • If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall). • If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object. The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation would not likely help the occupants. The side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not likely help the occupant. A side impact airbag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact. 1-51 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both the frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front seatbacks and behind the rear seatbacks closest to the door. How Does an Airbag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag. 1-52 Side impact airbags would not help you in many types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the side impact airbags. What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbag inflated. Some components of the airbag module — the steering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest to the door for the side impact airbags — will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle. • Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an {CAUTION: When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the door lock and interior lamp controls. In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag. airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your airbag system. If you do not get them, the air bag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts. • Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders on page 7-9 for more information. • Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag system. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service. Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag covering on the driver’s, right front passenger’s or rear seatback, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel, both the airbag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or both the airbag module and seatback for the side impact airbag. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. 1-53 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11. Restraint System Check Checking Your Restraint Systems Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. {CAUTION: Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag systems. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so. Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.) The airbag system does not need regular maintenance. 1-54 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash {CAUTION: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH system parts? After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new parts. If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision. If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section. If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision. After a crash you may need to replace the driver and front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies, even if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver and front passenger’s safety belt buckle assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-45. If the LATCH system was being used during a more severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts. 1-55 ✍ NOTES 1-56 Section 2 Features and Controls Keys ...............................................................2-3 Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-5 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-6 Doors and Locks .............................................2-8 Door Locks ....................................................2-8 Central Door Unlocking System ........................2-9 Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-10 Lockout Protection ........................................2-11 Trunk ..........................................................2-12 Windows ........................................................2-15 Power Windows ............................................2-16 Sun Visors ...................................................2-18 Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-19 Valet Lockout Switch .....................................2-21 PASS-Key® III ..............................................2-21 PASS-Key® III Operation ...............................2-22 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-24 New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-24 Ignition Positions ..........................................2-24 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-25 Starting Your Engine .....................................2-26 Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-27 Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-28 Performance Shifting (DTS Only) ....................2-31 Parking Brake ..............................................2-31 Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-32 Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-34 Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-35 Engine Exhaust ............................................2-35 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-36 Mirrors ...........................................................2-37 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................................................2-37 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-37 Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-40 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-41 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .....................2-41 Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-41 Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-41 OnStar® System .............................................2-42 HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-44 Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-45 Storage Areas ................................................2-48 Glove Box ...................................................2-48 Instrument Panel Storage Area .......................2-48 Cellular Telephone ........................................2-48 Front Storage Area .......................................2-49 2-1 Section 2 Features and Controls Full Floor Console Storage Area .....................2-49 Center Console Storage Area .........................2-49 Center Flex Storage Unit ...............................2-50 Map Pocket .................................................2-50 Assist Handles .............................................2-50 Umbrella Holder ...........................................2-51 2-2 Rear Storage Area ........................................2-51 Rear Storage Door Trim Armrest .....................2-51 Convenience Net ..........................................2-51 Sunroof .........................................................2-51 Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-52 Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel .......2-52 Keys {CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. If they turned the ignition to ACCESSORY or ON and moved the shift lever out of PARK (P), that would release the parking brake. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children. 2-3 Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft system. Both the master and VALET key have a transponder in the key head that matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column. If a replacement key or any additional key is needed, you must purchase this key from your dealer. The key will have PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that came with the original keys. Give this tag to your dealer if you need a new key made. Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Key® III on page 2-21 for more information on programming your new key. Master Key Valet Key Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. There is a master key that works all of the lock cylinders (driver’s door, trunk, ignition and glove box). In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-5. There is also a VALET key which only operates the driver’s door and the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-42 for more information. 2-4 Remote Keyless Entry System Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this: • Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather. • Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. • Check to determine if battery replacement is necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-6. • If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. 2-5 Remote Keyless Entry System Operation With this system you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle. Q (Lock): Press this symbol to lock the doors. The parking lamps will flash once and the horn will sound. This arms the theft-deterrent system. The parking lamps will not flash, however, if the manual parking lamps are left on. Remote confirmation is not operational if a door is open. You can program your vehicle so the parking lamps will not flash and the horn will not sound. For more information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68. 2-6 W(Unlock): Press this symbol to unlock the driver’s door. The parking lamps on your vehicle will flash twice. The parking lamps will not flash if they have been turned on manually. Remote confirmation is not operational if a door is open. Press this button again within one to five seconds to unlock the other doors. It will also disarm the theft-deterrent system and turn on the interior lamps at night. You can program your vehicle so the parking lamps will not flash. For more information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68. L (Panic Alarm): Press the horn symbol when the ignition is turned off to use the alarm. The horn will sound and the exterior lamps will flash for up to 30 seconds. To stop the instant panic alarm, press the symbol again or turn the ignition to ON. V (Trunk): Press this button to open the trunk. The valet lockout switch must be off for this feature to work. See Valet Lockout Switch under Theft-Deterrent Systems on page 2-19 for more information. The remote keyless entry transmitter can be used to recall the memory settings for up to two drivers. For more information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68 and Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-52. Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it. Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter. Vehicles are delivered with two transmitters. See your dealer for information on how to obtain additional transmitters. Battery Replacement Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about four years. You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is probably time to change the battery. 1. Use an object like a coin to pry open the transmitter. 2. Once the transmitter is separated, use an object like a pencil to remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. 2-7 Doors and Locks Door Locks {CAUTION: 3. Insert the new battery as the instructions under the cover indicate. 4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure no moisture can enter. 5. Press any button on the remote keyless entry transmitter to resynchronize the transmitter. 6. Check the operation of the transmitter. 2-8 Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Passengers — especially children — can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive. • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever you leave it. • Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening. There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle. Because your vehicle has the theft-deterrent system, you must unlock the doors with the key or remote keyless entry transmitter to avoid setting off the alarm. From the outside, use either the key or the remote keyless entry transmitter. From the inside, use the manual lock levers located at the top of the door panel near the window. Central Door Unlocking System Your vehicle has a central door unlocking mode and a theft-deterrent system. When unlocking the driver’s door, you can unlock the other doors by holding the key in the turned position for a few seconds or by quickly turning the door key twice in the lock cylinder. Power Door Locks The power door lock switches are located on the door panels near the windows. Push down the manual lock lever to lock the door. To unlock the door, pull up on the lever. 2-9 Press the bottom part of the power door lock switch located on either front door to lock all of the doors at once. Press the top of the switch to unlock all of the doors at once. If your vehicle has rear door lock switches, they can also lock all the doors at once by pressing the bottom part of the switch, but they cannot unlock the doors. Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors on your vehicle from the inside. The rear door security locks are located on the edge of each rear door. You must open the doors to access them. Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle is programmed so that, when the doors are closed, the ignition is on and the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P), all the doors will lock. The doors will unlock every time you stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK (P). If someone needs to get out while your vehicle is not in PARK (P), have the person use the manual lever or power door lock switch. When the door is closed again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual lever or power door lock switch to lock the door. With the vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition in ON, the door locks can be programmed through prompts displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). These prompts allow the driver to choose various lock and unlock settings. For programming information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68. 2-10 To use these locks, do the following: 1. Turn the knob located on the passenger’s side rear door clockwise to engage the lock. 2. Close the door. 3. Turn the knob located on the driver’s side rear door counterclockwise to engage the lock. The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use. When you want to open a rear door while the security lock is on, do the following: 1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry transmitter, the front door power lock switch or by lifting the rear door manual lock. 2. Then open the door from the outside. To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following: 1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside. 2. Turn the knob on the passenger’s side of the rear door counterclockwise all the way back to the original position. Lockout Protection Leaving your key in any ignition position with any door open will disable the power door lock switches as well as the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. If you close the doors, you can lock them using the remote keyless entry transmitter. It is always recommended that you remove the ignition key when locking your vehicle. The anti-lockout feature can be overridden by holding the power door lock switch for three seconds or longer. 3. Turn the knob on the driver’s side of the rear door clockwise all the way back to the original position. The rear door locks will now work normally. 2-11 Trunk {CAUTION: It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk lid: • Make sure all other windows are shut. • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehicle. See Climate Control System in the Index. • If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-35. 2-12 Trunk Lock Release The trunk lock release button is located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. Press the button to open the trunk. To use this feature, your vehicle must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and the valet lockout switch must be off. You can also press the button with the trunk symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter to open the trunk. To disable this feature, see Valet Lockout Switch on page 2-21. Trunk Lid Tie Down {CAUTION: Driving with the trunk lid open can allow dangerous CO (carbon monoxide) gas to come into your vehicle. You can not see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you ever need to drive with your trunk lid open, then: • Make sure all windows, the rear seat pass-through and sunroof are closed. • Turn the fan on your heating and cooling system to its highest speed, with the setting on AUTO and temperature between 65°F (18°C) and 85°F (29°C). This forces fresh outside air into your vehicle. • Open all air ducts on the instrument panel. Do not use the trunk lid tie down if you are towing a trailer because of the danger of CO. Your vehicle may be equipped with a trunk-lid tie down. This feature is used to secure the trunk lid if it will not close completely, such as when carrying large packages in the trunk. Use the following steps to secure the trunk lid: 1. Attach the clip end of the tie down to the D ring on the trunk lid (A). 2. Attach the hook end of the tie down to the striker located at the center of the trunk sill (B). 3. Tighten the tie down by pulling the free end of the cord until secure. 4. To remove the tie down, press the clip end release and loosen the cord. 2-13 Emergency Trunk Release Handle Rear Seat Pass Through Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing items in the trunk may damage it. Use the emergency trunk release handle only to help you open the trunk lid. Your vehicle may be equipped with a small door in the rear seat. The door allows you to access the trunk from inside the vehicle. There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release handle located inside the trunk near the latch. This handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the release handle upward to open the trunk from the inside. 2-14 The rear-seat armrest must be down for the pass-through door to open. To release the pass-through door, move the release up with your fingers. Then close the door so it latches from inside the vehicle. Windows {CAUTION: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 2-15 Power Windows Express-Down Window This feature is on all power windows. Press the down arrow on the switch to the second position to activate the express-down feature. If you want to stop the window as it is lowering, press the down arrow on the switch again. Express-Up Window This feature is on both front power windows. Press the up arrow on the switch to the second position to activate the express-up feature. If you want to stop the window as it is raising, press the up arrow on the switch again. Anti-Pinch Feature The power window switches are located on the armrest near each window. Press the up or down arrows on the switches to raise or lower the windows. Your vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP) that allows you to use the power windows once the ignition has been turned off. For more information, see Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25. 2-16 If any object is in the path of the window when the express-up is active, the window will stop at the obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position. Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to normal operation once the obstruction or condition is removed. Window Lockout {CAUTION: If express override is activated, the window will not reverse automatically. You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged. Before you use express override, make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path. The rear window lockout button is located on the driver’s door armrest next to the window switches. Express Window Override A condition may exist that causes auto-reversal of the window due to weather or an obstruction. In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window switch all the way down in the express position. The window will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is released, the express mode is re-activated. Pressing this button will disable the rear window controls. The light on the button will illuminate, indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows still can be raised or lowered using the driver’s window switches when the lockout feature is active. To restore power to the rear windows, press the button again. The light on the button will go out. In this mode, the window can still close on an object in its path. Use care when using the override mode. 2-17 Sun Visors Rear Power Sunshade Swing down the primary visor to block out glare. It can also be detached from the center mount and moved to the side while the auxiliary sunshade remains to block the glare from the front. The visors also have side-to-side slide capability. If your vehicle is equipped with the rear power sunshade, it helps to reduce the amount of heat and light entering the rear window. The driver’s sunshade is also equipped with a storage flap. Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror Pull the visor down and lift the cover to view the mirror. The light will come on when the cover is opened. It will go out when you close the cover. If your vehicle has the adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up or down to brighten or dim the light. Lighted Rear Vanity Mirror Your vehicle may have lighted visor vanity mirrors for the rear seat passengers. Pull the vanity cover down to see the mirror. The light will come on when the cover is opened. It will go out when you close the cover. If your vehicle has the adjustable lighting feature, slide the switch up or down to brighten or dim the light. 2-18 The rear power sunshade is located in the rear shelf. The rear power sunshade switch only works while the ignition is on or while the retained accessory power is active. See Ignition Positions on page 2-24. To raise the power sunshade, press and release the REAR SHADE switch located on the front overhead console. To close the power sunshade, press and release the REAR SHADE switch again. Theft-Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. The SECURITY light is located on the instrument panel cluster. Never store objects on the rear shelf because they may get caught in the sunshade or be tossed about in your vehicle. Manual Rear Side Door Sunshade Your vehicle may have manual rear side door sunshades. To use the sunshades, lower the side windows and hook the top edge of the retractable sunshades over the edge of the windows and raise the windows. To remove the shades, lower the windows and the hooks will disengage automatically. If the ignition is off and any door is open, the SECURITY light will flash, reminding you to arm the system. To arm the system, do the following: 1. Open the door. 2. Lock the door using the power door lock switch with the door open or the remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY light should come on and stay on. 3. Close all the doors. The SECURITY light should go off within approximately 30 seconds. 2-19 If a door or the trunk is opened without a key or a remote keyless entry transmitter, the horn will sound and the lamps will flash for about 30 seconds. Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not arm if you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock with the door open or the remote keyless entry transmitter. To avoid activating the alarm by accident do the following: • The vehicle should be locked with the door key or the manual door lock after the doors are closed if you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent system. • Always unlock a door with a key or use the remote keyless entry transmitter system. Pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter disables the theft-deterrent system. Unlocking a door any other way will activate the alarm when a door or the trunk is opened. If you activate the alarm by accident, unlock the driver’s door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by using the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter system, or by starting the car with a valid key. Changes or modifications made to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the theft system. 2-20 Testing the Alarm 1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window, then get out of the vehicle, keeping the door open. 2. From outside of the vehicle, with the door open, lock the vehicle using the power door lock or the remote keyless entry system and close the door. Wait 30 seconds until the SECURITY lamp goes off. 3. Reach in and unlock the door using the manual lock and open the door. The horn will sound and the hazard lights will flash. You can turn off the alarm by unlocking the driver’s door with your key, using the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by starting the car with a valid key. If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-98. If the fuse does not need to be replaced, you may need to have your vehicle serviced. To reduce the possibility of theft, always arm the theft-deterrent system when leaving your vehicle. Valet Lockout Switch The valet lockout switch is located inside the glove box. PASS-Key® III Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. Press the switch to ON to disable the use of the trunk, fuel door, garage door opener and optional cellular telephone. The remote keyless entry transmitter cannot open the trunk if the valet lockout switch is in ON. Press this switch to OFF to enable the use of the trunk, fuel door, garage door opener and optional cellular telephone. Locking the glove box with your key will also help to secure your vehicle. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle. 2-21 PASS-Key® III Operation Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS-Key® III (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III is a passive theft-deterrent system. This means you do not have to do anything different to arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert or remove your key from the ignition. When the PASS-Key® III system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes. When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again. If the engine does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-98. If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III to have a new key made. It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional keys only. 2-22 Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys, only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key® III to have new keys made. To program additional keys you will require two current driver’s keys (black in color). You must add a step to the following procedure. After Step 2, repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the second current driver’s key. Then continue with Step 3. To program the new key do the following: 1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it. 2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not start see your dealer for service. 3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF, and remove the key. 4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to ON within 10 seconds of removing the previous key. 5. The SECURITY light will turn off once the key has been programmed. It may not be apparent that the SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the key is programmed. 6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed. If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS- Key® III system, however, is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key® III system at this time. If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, contact your dealer to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Service on page 7-5. 2-23 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle Ignition Positions With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn the key to four different positions. New Vehicle Break-In Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: • Do not drive at any one speed — fast or slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. • Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-37 for more information. 2-24 Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service. A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can insert or remove the key. This position locks the ignition and transaxle. It is a theft-deterrent feature. B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use things like the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine is off. This position will allow you to turn off the engine. If your vehicle has a column shifter, you will still be able to move the shift lever. Use ACCESSORY if you must have your vehicle in motion while the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is being pushed or towed. C (ON): This position is for driving. If your vehicle has a console shifter and you turn off the engine, the transaxle will lock. If you need to shift the transaxle out of PARK (P), the ignition key has to be in ON. D (START): This position starts the engine. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) The following accessories on your vehicle may be used for up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned from ON to OFF: • • • • • Cellular Telephone Radio Power Windows Audio Steering Wheel Controls Sunroof Power to these accessories stops after 10 minutes or if a door is opened. If you want power for another 10 minutes, close all the doors and turn the ignition key to ON and then back to OFF. If the cellular phone is being used while retained accessory power is active, the timer is suspended to avoid interruption of the call. The timer resets to 10 minutes at the end of the call. 2-25 Starting Your Engine Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). The engine will not start in any other position — that is a safety feature. To restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped. 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter. 2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, hold your key in START for about 10 seconds at a time until the engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try. When your engine has run for about 10 seconds to warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not race your engine when it is cold. If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let the engine run for a few minutes to warm up. 3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds to clear the extra gasoline from the engine. After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure. Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine might not perform properly. 2-26 Engine Coolant Heater Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant heater. In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required. To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine, behind the transaxle dipstick/fluid fill location and next to the engine. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. {CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged. How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area. 2-27 Automatic Transaxle Operation The automatic transaxle may have a shift lever located either on the steering column or on the console between the seats. There are several different positions for the shift lever. PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels. It is the best position to use when you start the engine because your vehicle cannot move easily. {CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Console Shifter Column Shifter (Digital and Analog Cluster similar) 2-28 Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-32. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-37. Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) while the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 2-34. REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up. Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Also use this gear to rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-29 for additional information. {CAUTION: Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing may damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting your vehicle. NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed. 2-29 AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you are: • Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down. • Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. The transaxle will shift down to the next gear and have more power. Notice: Driving your vehicle if you notice that it is moving slowly or not shifting gears as you increase speed may damage the transaxle. Have your vehicle serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2) when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE X for higher speeds until then. THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X). Here are examples for using THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X): • When driving on hilly, winding roads. • When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears. • When going down a steep hill. SECOND (2): This position gives you more power than THIRD (3). You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on. Notice: Do not shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your engine. FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place. 2-30 Performance Shifting (DTS Only) When your vehicle detects a change in driving conditions, it will automatically initiate the appropriate performance shift mode. When this occurs, the gear display on the instrument panel cluster will change to indicate that the transaxle has shifted to a different gear. For example, the gear display on the cluster may indicate 3 or 2 even though the gearshift is still in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (X). Once the performance shift mode ends, the gear display on the instrument panel cluster will return to normal. Parking Brake The parking brake pedal is located to the left of the regular brake pedal, near the driver’s door. This vehicle has a PUSH TO RELEASE parking brake pedal. To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal down with your left foot. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it does not, you need to have your vehicle serviced. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal down with your left foot. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the released position. If you try to drive with the parking brake on, after about 20 feet (6.1 m) a chime will sound continuously until you release the parking brake. Also, the brake light will stay on until the parking brake is released. Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-37. 2-31 Shifting Into Park (P) 3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal down, set the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition key to OFF. {CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-37. Steering Column Shift Lever If your vehicle is equipped with a steering column shift lever, use the following procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P): 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot. 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it will go. 2-32 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). Console Shift Lever If your vehicle is equipped with a console shift lever, use the following procedure to shift the vehicle into PARK (P): 1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot. 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pushing the lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle and then to the left. 3. With your right foot still holding the brake pedal down, set the parking brake. 4. Turn the ignition key to OFF. 5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P). Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running {CAUTION: It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running. Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-32. If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. 2-33 Shifting Out of Park (P) If you ever hold the pedal down but still cannot shift out of PARK (P), try the following: Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is ON. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-28. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. Open and close the driver’s door to turn off the RAP feature. The shift lock control system is designed to do the following: 4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want. • Prevent the ignition key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK (P), and • prevent movement of the console shift lever (DTS only) out of PARK (P) unless the ignition is in a position other than OFF. The shift lock control system is always functional except in the case of a dead battery or low voltage (less than 9 V) battery. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease the pressure on the shift lever. Push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you want. 2-34 2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4. 3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N). 5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can. Parking Over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust {CAUTION: Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death. {CAUTION: Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn. You might have exhaust coming in if: • Your exhaust system sounds strange or different. • Your vehicle gets rusty underneath. • Your vehicle was damaged in a collision. • Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris. • Repairs were not done correctly. • Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly. If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle: • Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and • Have your vehicle fixed immediately. 2-35 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. {CAUTION: Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle. See the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust on page 2-35. Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the climate control fan is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running. Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See Winter Driving on page 4-25. 2-36 {CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake after you move the shift lever to PARK (P). Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-32. If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-37. Mirrors Cleaning the Mirror Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror with OnStar® system controls. For more information about OnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 2-42. When the automatic dimming feature is turned on, the mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you. A photocell on the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another photocell built into the mirror face senses when headlamps are behind you. At night, when the glare is too bright, the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare. This change may take a few seconds. The mirror will return to its clear, daytime state when the glare is reduced. Mirror Operation Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® and Compass Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview mirror with a compass display. The mirror also contains OnStar® controls. For more information see OnStar® System on page 2-42. The automatic dimming feature functions the same as that of the automatic dimming rearview mirror without a compass. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® on page 2-37. The mirror also includes an eight-point compass display in the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on, the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven. O (On/Off): Press the on/off button, located on the lower left side of the mirror face, to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The indicator light will be illuminated when the automatic dimming feature is on. 2-37 Mirror Operation O(On/Off): Press and hold the button, located on the lower left side of the mirror face, for about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or off. The indicator light will illuminate when this feature is active. The automatic dimming feature is active each time the vehicle is started. Compass Operation Press the on/off button once to turn the compass on or off. When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the compass will show two character boxes for about two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display the compass heading. Compass Calibration If after two seconds, the display does not show a compass heading (for example, N for North), there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with the compass. Such interference may be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder or a similar magnetic item. If the letter C should ever appear in the compass window, the compass may need calibration. 2-38 The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display reads a direction. The compass can be placed in calibration mode manually by pressing and holding the on/off button until a C is shown in the compass display. Compass Variance The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance, your compass could give false readings. To adjust for compass variance do the following: 1. Find the current location and variance zone number on the following zone map. 2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone number appears in the display. 3. Once the zone number appears in the display, press the on/off button quickly until the correct zone number appears in the display. Stop pressing the button and the mirror will return to normal operation. If C appears in the compass window, the compass may need calibration. See Compass Calibration listed previously. Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing. 2-39 Outside Power Mirrors The control on the driver’s door armrest operates both outside rearview mirrors. To adjust a mirror, press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror in the direction you want the mirror to go. Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle. The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to their original unfolded positions before driving. The mirrors also have an arrow on the mirror face that flashes in the direction of the turn when the turn signal is used. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8. Press (R) on the selector switch to choose the right mirror or (L) to choose the left mirror. The center position is off and will not allow the mirrors to move if the control pad is touched. 2-40 The mirrors can also be programmed for personalization and the parallel parking feature if you have the optional memory package. For more information, see Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-52 and DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68. Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If the vehicle is equipped with this feature, the driver’s side mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off settings on the automatic dimming rearview mirror. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® on page 2-37. Outside Curb View Assist Mirror If your vehicle is equipped with memory mirrors, it will also be capable of performing the curb view assist mirror feature. This feature will allow the passenger’s side mirror to tilt to a factory programmed position when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This feature may be useful in allowing you to view the curb when you are parallel parking. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (R) and a five-second delay has occurred, the passenger’s side mirror will return to its original position. If further adjustment is needed after the mirror is tilted, the mirror switch may be used. This feature can be enabled/disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68 for more information. Outside Convex Mirror {CAUTION: A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver’s seat. This mirror does not have a dimming feature. Outside Heated Mirrors When you operate the rear window defogger, it also warms both outside mirrors to help clear them of fog or ice. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-30 for more information. 2-41 OnStar® System OnStar® Services OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite technology, wireless communications, and call centers to provide you with a wide range of safety, security, information, and convenience services. The Directions and Connections Plan is included on new vehicles for one year from the date of purchase. This OnStar® subscription plan can be extended beyond the first year to fit your needs. A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Directions and Connections Plan • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment • Emergency Services • Roadside Assistance • Stolen Vehicle Tracking • AccidentAssist • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert • Remote Diagnostics • Online Concierge • Driving Directions • RideAssist • Information and Convenience Services Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com. 2-42 OnStar® Personal Calling OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling capability is a hands-free wireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice commands with no additional contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com; or speak to an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). A steering wheel control can be used to interact with the OnStar® personal calling feature. Press the top part of the control with this symbol on the steering wheel, to connect to OnStar®. Place a phone call after the ready prompt is heard. OnStar® Virtual Advisor Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates, stock quotes, entertainment, and more. You are also able to listen and reply to E-mail through the vehicle’s audio system. Customize your information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information. If the vehicle has the Navigation System, a ready prompt will come from that system first. Say the word “phone” to make a call. When calling into voice mail systems, or to dial directory numbers, press the control, say the number(s), then say “dial”. To end a call, press the bottom part of the control labeled END. See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information. 2-43 HomeLink® Transmitter If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink® Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional Homelink® information can be found on the internet at www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515. 2-44 Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter. Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you in programming the transmitter. Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink® Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515. Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate operator you are programming. When programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage. It is recommended that a new battery be installed in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio frequency. Programming HomeLink® Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to program up to three channels: 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons, releasing only when the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program a second and/or third transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons. 2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® buttons while keeping the indicator light in view. 2-45 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4 has been completed. Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” later in this section. 4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons. 5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.” Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the programmed channels. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the programming of a rolling-code equipped device (most commonly, a garage door opener). 2-46 6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. 7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart” button. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8. 8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds, then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time, and depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code equipped device. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You do not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous programming. Gate Operator and Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to “time out” in the same manner. If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator by using the “Programming HomeLink® ” procedures (regardless of where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming HomeLink® ” with the following: Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while you press and release every two seconds (cycle) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink® ” to complete. Using HomeLink® Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted. Erasing HomeLink® Buttons To erase programming from the three buttons do the following: 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer than 30 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section. Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button” following this section. 2-47 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button Storage Areas To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink® button previously trained, follow these steps: Glove Box 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink® button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink® ” shown earlier in this section. Instrument Panel Storage Area Resetting Defaults To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following: 1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about 20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash. ® 2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink indicator light turns off. 3. Release both buttons. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at 1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com. 2-48 To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove box has a light inside. This storage compartment is located in the center of the instrument panel below the radio. Pull the door out to reveal the accessory power outlet and storage compartment. To clean the storage compartment, lift out while pulling on the sides. Cellular Telephone Your vehicle may have been prewired for dealer installation of a portable cellular telephone system. The system has steering wheel telephone controls and information output through the Driver Information Center (DIC). Voice activation with remote record and hands-free operation are standard features. For more information, contact your dealer. A user’s guide is provided with the telephone. Front Storage Area Center Console Storage Area If your vehicle is equipped with the front storage area, it comes with a coinholder, a storage compartment, an optional cellular telephone and a dual cupholder. If your vehicle is equipped with the center console, it comes with a storage tray, a storage compartment for CDs or tapes, a dual cupholder that unfolds, a coinholder, an optional phone and an armrest. The cupholder can be opened by pressing on the surface panel located in front of the armrest and unfolding it. Close the lid to secure it. Full Floor Console Storage Area If your vehicle is equipped with the full floor console, it has an upper and lower storage area. The upper storage area is available for the optional cellular telephone. The lower storage area has two removable bins that can hold tapes and/or CDs. To open the console, pull up on either lever to open the upper or lower storage area. There is also a removable coinholder that attaches to the side of one of the bins. A dual cupholder is located in front of the console. Open and close by pressing on the cupholder. 2-49 Center Flex Storage Unit When not being used, the center seat lap belt can be stored in the underseat storage compartment as shown. Your vehicle may be equipped with a center flex storage unit that includes a front center seat with a lap belt and an underseat storage compartment. The center seatback can also be used as a fold down armrest with extra space for CDs or tapes. An optional cellular telephone may be located in the underseat storage compartment. Cupholders are also located at the front edge of the storage unit and can be accessed by folding the compartment forward. Map Pocket The map/storage pockets are located on each front door and on the rear door trim as well as on the back of both front seatbacks. Assist Handles A handle above each door can be used when getting out of your vehicle. 2-50 Umbrella Holder Sunroof The passenger’s front seat cushion is equipped with an umbrella holder. Gently slide the umbrella into the slot located under the front portion of the passenger’s seat cushion. Rear Storage Area Your vehicle is equipped with a rear seat armrest which includes an open storage compartment and a dual cupholder. To open, release the latch at the front edge. Rear Storage Door Trim Armrest Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear storage door trim armrest. The storage area is located in the rear door trim under the switch plate lid and includes an accessory power outlet. Convenience Net Your vehicle may be equipped with a convenience net. The convenience net attaches to the floor of the trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the trunk as far forward as you can. When not using the net, hook the net to the tabs securing it to the sill plate. Your vehicle may have a sunroof. The switches that operate the sunroof are located on the overhead console. Press and hold the ROOF switch rearward to the first position to open the glass panel and sunshade. The sunshade also can be opened or closed manually. To close the glass panel, press and hold the ROOF switch forward. As the sunroof reaches the closed position, it will open slightly toward the vent position and then drop down to the closed position to provide a better seal. 2-51 Press and release the ROOF switch rearward to the second position to express-open the glass panel to the comfort stop position, approximately half-way open. The comfort stop position is designed to help reduce noise and make the rear seat passengers more comfortable. The glass panel may then be fully opened by pressing the ROOF switch again. If you press and hold the ROOF switch in the express-open position for more than one second, the express-open operation will be over-ridden and the sunroof will stop when the switch is released. To stop the glass panel when express opening, press the ROOF or VENT switch forward or rearward and release. To vent the glass panel, press and hold the VENT switch in the open position. The sunshade must be opened manually when using the vent position. To close the glass panel, press and hold the VENT switch in the close position. The ROOF and VENT switches work only when the ignition is on or when RAP is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25. 2-52 Vehicle Personalization Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel Your vehicle may be equipped with the memory package. The controls for these features are located on the driver’s door panel, and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver’s seat, outside mirror and steering wheel positions. To save your positions in memory, do the following: 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors and the steering wheel to a comfortable position. 2. Press and hold button 1. After a brief delay, two beeps will sound through the driver’s side front speaker to let you know that the position has been stored. A second seating, mirror and steering wheel position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2 (for driver 2). To recall your memory positions while the vehicle is in PARK (P), push and release either button 1 or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat, outside mirrors and steering wheel will move to the position previously stored for the identified driver. You will hear a single beep. If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), the memory buttons must be pressed and held to recall the stored positions. If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is on, automatic seat and mirror movement will occur. The numbers on the back of the transmitters, 1 and 2, correspond to the numbers on the buttons on the driver’s door panel. When the key is placed in the ignition in OFF and you have entered the vehicle without using the remote keyless entry transmitter and the remote recall memory feature is on, the seat, mirrors and steering wheel will automatically adjust to the programmed position of the last driver. 2-53 To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any time, press one of the power seat controls or memory buttons. To store the exit position for an easy exit, do the following: 1. Recall the driver position by pressing button 1, or by pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter 1. 2. Adjust the driver’s seat and steering wheel to the desired exit positions. 3. Press and hold the EXIT button. After a brief delay, two beeps will sound through the driver’s side front speaker to let you know that the position has been stored. An exit position for driver position 2 can be programmed by repeating the above steps, pressing button 2 (for driver 2) and using remote keyless entry transmitter number 2. 2-54 With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position for the previously set driver can be recalled by pressing the EXIT button. You will hear a single beep. The mirrors and power lumbar positions will not be stored or recalled. Further programming for automatic seat and steering wheel movement can be done using the Driver Information Center (DIC). You can select or not select the following: • Automatic seat and steering wheel movement when the vehicle is unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. • Automatic seat and steering wheel movement when a key is placed in the ignition. For programming information, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68. Section 3 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4 Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6 Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6 Horn .............................................................3-6 Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6 Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ......................................................3-7 Heated Steering Wheel ...................................3-7 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9 Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9 Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9 Rainsense™ II Wipers ...................................3-10 Windshield Washer .......................................3-11 Cruise Control ..............................................3-12 Exterior Lamps .............................................3-15 Wiper Activated Headlamps ............................3-16 Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-16 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16 Fog Lamps ..................................................3-18 Cornering Lamps ..........................................3-18 Twilight Sentinel® ..........................................3-18 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ........................3-20 Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-20 Courtesy Lamps ...........................................3-21 Entry Lighting ...............................................3-21 Parade Dimming ...........................................3-21 Reading Lamps ............................................3-22 Battery Load Management .............................3-22 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .....................3-23 Night Vision System ......................................3-23 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3-26 Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-28 Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-29 Climate Controls ............................................3-30 Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-30 Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-34 Rear Climate Control System .........................3-35 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3-36 Steering Wheel Climate Controls .....................3-38 Climate Controls Personalization .....................3-39 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-40 Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-41 Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-43 Trip Odometer ..............................................3-43 Tachometer (Analog Cluster Only) ...................3-44 Engine Speed Limiter ....................................3-44 Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-45 Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-45 Charging System Light ..................................3-46 Brake System Warning and Parking Brake Indicator Light ...........................................3-47 3-1 Section 3 Instrument Panel Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-48 Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ......3-48 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light ......3-49 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-49 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-50 Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-53 Security Light ...............................................3-53 Fog Lamp Light ............................................3-54 Lights On Reminder ......................................3-54 Cruise Control Light ......................................3-54 Highbeam On Light .......................................3-54 Fuel Gage ...................................................3-55 Fuel Data Display (Digital Cluster Only) ...........3-56 Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-57 DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-57 DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-60 Climate Controls and Radio System Personalization ..........................................3-68 DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-68 Trip Computer ................................................3-79 Oil Life Indicator ...........................................3-79 3-2 Audio System(s) .............................................3-79 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-80 Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) .........................................3-80 Radio with CD ..............................................3-80 Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-87 Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-99 Glovebox-Mounted CD Changer ......................3-99 Radio Personalization with Home and Away Feature ..................................................3-102 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-103 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-103 Radio Reception .........................................3-104 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-104 Care of Your CDs .......................................3-106 Care of Your CD Player ...............................3-106 Diversity Antenna System .............................3-106 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-107 ✍ NOTES 3-3 Instrument Panel Overview 3-4 The main components of the instrument panel are the following: A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-34. B. Fog Lamp Button (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps on page 3-18. C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8. D. Climate Controls and OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls (or Cellular Telephone Controls). See Steering Wheel Climate Controls on page 3-38 and OnStar® System on page 2-42. E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-41. F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-103. G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-57. H. Climate Controls. See Dual Climate Control System on page 3-30. I. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on page 3-15. J. Twilight Sentinel® Control. See Twilight Sentinel® on page 3-18. K. Night Vision Controls (If Equipped). See Night Vision System on page 3-23. L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11. M. Heated Steering Wheel Button (If Equipped). See Heated Steering Wheel on page 3-7. N. Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on page 3-12. O. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6. P. Radio. See Audio System(s) on page 3-79. Q. Ashtray. See Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-29. R. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-48. 3-5 Hazard Warning Flashers Horn Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off. The horn can be sounded by pressing on the center of the steering wheel pad. The hazard warning flasher button is located near the center of the instrument panel. Tilt Wheel A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to the highest level to give your legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle. The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left side of the steering column. Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key is not in. Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals will not work. Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle. 3-6 To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever. Then move the wheel to a comfortable position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column If your vehicle has this feature, the power tilt wheel control is located on the outboard side of the steering column. Push the control forward and the steering wheel moves toward the front of the vehicle. Push the control rearward and the steering wheel moves toward the rear of the vehicle. To set the memory position, see DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68 and Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-52. Heated Steering Wheel Your vehicle may have a heated steering wheel. The button for this feature is located on the steering wheel. To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the control down and the steering wheel will go down. If the power tilt control is pressed up or down and held in that position, there will be a slight movement and a slight pause followed by a continuous movement in the direction the control is being pressed. This allows very fine control of the steering wheel position. If the control is bumped, the steering wheel moves approximately one degree in the direction commanded. Press the button to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. A light on the button will display while the feature is on. The steering wheel will take about three minutes to reach its maximum temperature. 3-7 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever Turn and Lane-Change Signals To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. The lever returns automatically when the turn is complete. An arrow on the instrument panel cluster and in the outside rearview mirror will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: • G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8 • 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9 • Flash-To-Pass Feature • N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on page 3-9. • L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer on page 3-11. For more information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior Lamps on page 3-15. 3-8 Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is complete. The lever returns when it is released. If the turn signal is left on, a warning chime will sound and the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display TURN SIGNAL ON after driving about a mile to remind you to turn it off. Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turn or lane change may be caused by a burned out signal bulb. Other drivers will not see the turn signal. Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possible accidents. Check the fuse and for burned-out bulbs if the arrow fails to work when signaling a turn. See Rear Underseat Fuse Block on page 5-101. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer Windshield Wipers Push forward to change the headlamps from low beam to high. Pull the lever back and then release it to change from high beam to low. To operate the windshield wipers turn the band, located on the multifunction lever, upward or downward. This light on the instrument panel cluster will be on, indicating high-beam usage. WIPER N: Turn the band on the turn signal lever to control the wipers. MIST: Turn the band toward you to MIST and then release it for a single wiping cycle. For more cycles, hold the band on MIST longer. LO or HI (Low or High): Turn the band away from you to either LO (low speed) or to HI (high speed), depending on the wiper speed you want. Flash-to-Pass This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass. Delay: Turn the band to one of the delay positions to set the wiper speed for a long or a short delay between wipes. The closer you move it to LO, the shorter the delay. Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use. When you do, the following will occur: • If the headlamps are either off or in the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as you hold the lever there. Release the lever to turn them off. • If the headlamps are on high beam, they will switch to low beam. To return to high beam, push the lever away from you. 3-9 OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the wipers. Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts. Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. Your vehicle is equipped with wiper-activated headlamps. After the windshield wipers have been on for approximately six seconds, the headlamps will automatically turn on. See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-16 for more information. Rainsense™ II Wipers If your vehicle has this feature, the moisture sensor is mounted on the interior side of the windshield behind the rearview mirror. It is used to automatically operate the wipers by monitoring the amount of moisture build-up on the windshield. Wipes occur as needed to clear the windshield depending on driving conditions and the sensitivity setting. In light rain or snow, fewer wipes will occur. In heavy rain or snow, wipes will occur more frequently. The Rainsense™ II wipers operate in a delay mode as well as a continuous low or high speed as needed. If the system is left on for long periods of time, occasional wipes may occur without any moisture on the windshield. This is normal and indicates that the Rainsense™ II system is activated. The Rainsense™ II system can be activated by turning the wiper band to one of the five sensitivity levels indicated on the wiper stalk. The position closest to OFF is the lowest sensitivity setting, level one. This allows more rain or snow to collect on the windshield between wipes. Turning the wiper band away from you to higher sensitivity levels increases the sensitivity of the system and frequency of wipes. The highest sensitivity setting, level five is closest to LO. A single wipe will occur each time you turn the wiper stalk to a higher sensitivity level to indicate that the sensitivity level has been increased. 3-10 Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers off when going through an automatic car wash. The MIST and wash cycles operate as normal and are not affected by the Rainsense™ II function. The Rainsense™ II system can be overridden at any time by manually turning the wiper band to LO or HI speed. When Rainsense™ II is active, the headlamps will turn on automatically. The headlamps will turn off again once the wipers turn off if it is light enough outside. If it is dark, they will remain on. See Wiper Activated Headlamps on page 3-16 for more information. Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on the exterior glass surface directly in front of the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause the moisture sensor to malfunction. Windshield Washer {CAUTION: In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. LPUSH Press and release this paddle, located at the top of the turn signal/multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers will clear the windshield and either stop or return to your preset speed. For more washer cycles, press and hold the paddle. CHECK WASHER FLUID will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low. 3-11 Cruise Control With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This is helpful on long trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When cruise control is on, you will see a CRUISE light on the instrument panel cluster. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on. Setting Cruise Control When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off. {CAUTION: {CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. 3-12 If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This shuts off the cruise control. But you do not need to reset it. Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can press the RES/ACC (resume/accelerate) button to return to your desired preset speed. The CRUISE light will be displayed again. The buttons to operate cruise control are located on the steering wheel. The vehicle will return to and stay at your preset speed. If you press and hold the RES/ACC button, the vehicle speed will increase until you release the button or apply the brake. Unless you want to go faster, do not press and hold the RES/ACC button. 1. Press the CRUISE ON/OFF button, located on the bottom left of the steering wheel, to turn cruise control on. An indicator light will come on to show that the cruise control is on. 2. Get up to the speed you want. 3. Press the SET/CST (coast) button located on the bottom right of the steering wheel. The CRUISE light will display on the instrument panel cluster. 4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. 3-13 Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed: Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier. • Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed. Press the SET/CST button, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed. • Press the RES/ACC button. Hold it there until you get up to the speed that you want, and then release the button. To increase your speed in very small amounts, briefly press the RES/ACC button and then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will speed up approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). The accelerate feature will only work after you have set the cruise control speed by pressing the SET/CST button. Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control: • Press the SET/CST button until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it. • To slow down in very small amounts, push the SET/CST button briefly. Each time you do this, the vehicle will slow down approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h). 3-14 Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Applying the brake or shifting into a lower gear will take you out of cruise control. If you need to apply the brake or shift to a lower gear due to the grade of the downhill slope, you may not want to attempt to use your cruise control feature. Ending Cruise Control To turn off the cruise control, step lightly on the brake pedal, or press the CRUISE ON/OFF button on the steering wheel. Erasing Speed Memory When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased. Exterior Lamps The exterior lamp control has three positions: The exterior lamp control is located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. 9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to turn off all lamps except the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). ; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the following: • • • • O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the control with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps. Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights The parking brake indicator light will come on and stay on while the parking lamps are on with the engine off and the ignition in ACCESSORY or ON. 5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this position turns on the headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps and lights. 3-15 Wiper Activated Headlamps Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use for approximately six seconds. To operate, the Twilight Sentinel® feature must be turned on. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. When the exterior lamp control is in the off position or parking lamp position and the wiper control is on delay, LO or HI, the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC). When the ignition is turned to OFF, the wiper-activated headlamps will immediately turn off. The wiper-activated headlamps will also turn off if the Twilight Sentinel® or the windshield wipers are turned off. Headlamps on Reminder A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off. 3-16 The DRL system will make the low-beam headlamps come on at reduced intensity when the following conditions are met: • It is still daylight and the ignition is on. • The exterior lamp control is in the off position. • The transaxle is not in PARK (P). When DRL are on, only your low-beam headlamps at reduced brightness will be on. No other exterior lamps such as the parking lamps, taillamps, etc. will be on when the DRL are being used. Your instrument panel will not be lit up either. When the Twilight Sentinel® lever is on and it is dark enough outside, the low-beam headlamps at reduced intensity will turn off and normal low-beam headlamp operation will occur. When the Twilight Sentinel® lever is on and it is bright enough outside, the regular lamps will go off, and the low-beam headlamps at reduced brightness will take over. If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will take approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness knob is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-20. Turning on the Twilight Sentinel® or the headlamps will deactivate the DRL and remove the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message. If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were turned on instead, the DRL will still deactivate and the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will continue to be displayed. To idle your vehicle with the DRL off at night, turn off the Twilight Sentinel® and shift the transaxle into PARK (P). Placing your vehicle in PARK (P) disables the DRL. The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK (P). To drive your vehicle with the DRL off, turn off the Twilight Sentinel® and manually turn on the parking lamps or fog lamps (if equipped). As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it. If it is dark enough outside and the Twilight Sentinel® lever is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display on the Driver’s Information Center (DIC). This message informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL are still illuminated. 3-17 Fog Lamps If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. The fog lamp button is located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. When the Twilight Sentinel® is on and the fog lamps are turned on, the fog lamps, headlamps and parking lamps will remain on. The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to operate. Cornering Lamps The cornering lamps come on when the headlamps or parking lamps are on and you signal a turn with the multifunction lever. They provide more light for cornering. Twilight Sentinel® When you press the fog lamp button, a fog lamp symbol in the button and the fog lamp light on the instrument panel cluster will come on to indicate that the fog lamps and the parking lamps are on. This lever is located next to the exterior lamp control. It automatically turns the lamps on and off by sensing how dark it is outside. Press the button again to turn them off. If you turn on the high-beam headlamps, the fog lamps will turn off. They will turn back on again when you switch to low-beam headlamps. To operate the Twilight Sentinel®, leave the exterior lamp control in the off position and move the TWILIGHT lever to any position but OFF. 3-18 If you move the lever all the way to the right, the lamps will remain on for approximately three minutes after the ignition has been turned to OFF. If you move the lever so it is barely on, the lamps will go off quickly when you turn the ignition switch out of OFF. You can adjust the delay time from only a few seconds to about three minutes. If it is dark enough outside and the Twilight Sentinel® lever is off, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). This message informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is recommended because it has become dark enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps. Turning on the Twilight Sentinel® or turning the exterior lamp control to the headlamp position will remove the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message. Light Sensor The light sensor for the DRL and the Twilight Sentinel® is located in the center of the front defogger grille. If you cover the sensor, it will read “dark” and the exterior lamps or the HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED message will be displayed whenever the ignition is on. 3-19 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver Instrument Panel Brightness If the manual parking lamps or headlamps have been left on, the exterior lamps will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF. This protects against draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on. The battery saver does not work if the headlamps are turned on after the ignition switch is turned to OFF. This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights. The knob for this feature is located to the right of the Twilight Sentinel® lever. If you need to leave the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, use the exterior lamp control to turn the lamps back on. To delay the lamps from turning off, see “Twilight Sentinel®” listed previously in this section. Press the knob to release it to the outward position. Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or counterclockwise to dim them. Press the knob to return it to the original storage position. 3-20 Courtesy Lamps Parade Dimming The courtesy lamps are located on the headliner above the rear seat. These lamps come on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob fully clockwise or when any door is opened and it is dark outside. Puddle lamps are located on the bottom of the front and rear door trim. This feature prohibits dimming of the digital displays and backlighting during daylight hours when the key is in the ignition and the headlamps are on. This feature operates with the light sensor for the Twilight Sentinel® and is fully automatic. When the light sensor reads darkness outside and the parking lamps are active, the digital displays can be adjusted by turning the instrument panel brightness knob counterclockwise to dim and clockwise to brighten lighting. Entry Lighting This feature turns on the courtesy lamps and the backlighting to the door switches and to the exterior lamp control when a door is opened or if you press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock button. If activated due to the transmitter, the lighting will remain active for about 40 seconds. Since the entry lighting system uses the light sensor, it must be dark outside in order for the courtesy lamps to turn on. The courtesy lamps turn off approximately 25 seconds after the last door is closed. They will dim to off if the ignition key is placed in ON, or immediately deactivate if the power locks are activated. 3-21 Reading Lamps Battery Load Management The battery load management feature is designed to monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle at a higher revolutions per minute (rpm) setting than normal to make sure the battery charges. High electrical loads may occur when several of the following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, the climate control fan at high speeds, heated seats and engine cooling fans. The reading lamps are located on the overhead console on the headliner and in the rear door opening. These lamps come on automatically when any door is opened and it is dark outside. For manual operation, press the button to turn them on. Press it again to turn them off. If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off. 3-22 If the battery continues to discharge, even with the engine idling at a higher rpm setting, some electrical loads will automatically be reduced. When this occurs, the rear window defogger may take slightly longer to clear the glass, the heated seats may not get as warm as they usually do and the fan may cut back to a lower speed. For more battery saving information, see “Battery Saver Active Message” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60. Inadvertent Power Battery Saver This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp, glove box lamp, or the garage door opener. When the ignition is turned off, the power to these features will automatically turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes if a new car has 15 miles (24 km) or less). Power will be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on. Night Vision System The optional Night Vision System can help you see better when you drive at night. The system works by sensing heat given off by objects in its field of view. Warmer objects, such as pedestrians, animals, and other moving vehicles, will appear whiter. Colder objects, such as the sky, signs, and parked vehicles, will appear darker. Use this system as an aid to help you in seeing objects beyond the headlamps. Do this by occasionally glancing at the image as you would a rearview mirror. Do not stare at the image. The Night Vision System can be operated if: • The instrument panel brightness knob is in any position except OFF. • It is dark enough outside. • The headlamps or fog lamps (if equipped) are on. • The ignition is turned to ON. 3-23 When the system comes on, you will see the Night Vision System symbol in the image. After about one minute, you should see the view of the road ahead. If you do not see the image after about two minutes (on cold days it may take longer for the image to display), there may be something wrong with the system. See your dealer for service. {CAUTION: The controls for this feature are located to the left of and below the steering wheel. They are used to adjust the brightness and location of the image. Adjust the IMAGE control so the image is as low as possible while remaining visible. Slide the dimmer control until the image is no brighter than necessary to clearly and comfortably see the image. 3-24 If the Night Vision System image is too bright, or too high in your field of view, it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it is dark outside. Be sure to keep the image dim and placed low in your field of view. Remember that the Night Vision System can only help you see objects that are warmer or colder than the surroundings. It can not sense things like brake lights, turn signals or emergency flashers, traffic lights, or signs. In dry, clear weather, the system can see pedestrians, animals, and the direction of the road ahead. In light rain, light snow, or light fog the image may not be as clear and you may not be able to see the direction of the road ahead. In more severe weather conditions, the image may be unclear and not usable. {CAUTION: Do not use the Night Vision System to replace your normal view of the road ahead. It can not tell you how far away things are. It senses only warmer or colder objects, not all objects. Driving by staring at the image might cause you not to see important objects in the road ahead. If you do not see something in time, you could have a crash in which you and others could be injured. Use the Night Vision System only as a driving aid. It is also important to keep your windshield, the HUD (Head-Up Display for the Night Vision System) lens, and the camera lens clean. If you do not keep everything clean, system performance may be affected. The HUD system is located on the driver’s side of the instrument panel, next to the windshield and the camera is located behind the center of the front grille. Use only household glass cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the HUD or camera lens. Wipe gently and dry thoroughly. Notice: When cleaning, be careful not to scratch the HUD or camera lenses. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the HUD lens because the cleaner could leak inside the unit and cause damage. The camera must also be aligned to work correctly. If the camera needs adjustment, see your dealer. Do not attempt to adjust the camera yourself. 3-25 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) {CAUTION: Your vehicle may be equipped with Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA). URPA is designed to help you park while in REVERSE (R) and operates only at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can help you avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles. The system can detect objects 5 feet (1.5 m) behind your vehicle and tell you how close those objects are to your rear bumper. Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist system, the driver must check carefully before backing up. The system does not operate above typical backing speeds of 3 mph (5 km/h) while parking. And, the system does not detect objects that are more than 5 feet (1.5 meters) behind the vehicle. So, unless you check carefully behind you before and when you back up, you could strike children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind you, and they could be injured or killed. Whether or not you are using rear park assist, always check carefully behind your vehicle before you back up and then watch closely as you do. 3-26 The URPA display is located inside the vehicle, above the rear window. It has three color-coded lights that can be seen through the rearview mirror or by turning around. The first time an object is detected while in REVERSE (R), a chime will sound and the following will occur in sequence, depending on the distance from the object: • At 5 feet (1.5 m) a chime will sound and one amber light will be lit; • at 40 inches (1.0 m) both amber lights will be lit; • at 20 inches (0.5 m) a continuous chime will sound and all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be lit; and • at 1 foot (0.3 m) a continuous chime will sound and How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). When the system comes on, the three lights on the display will briefly illuminate to let you know that the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will flash to remind you the system does not work at this speed. all three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash. URPA can detect objects 3 inches (7.6 cm) and wider, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) tall, but it cannot detect objects that are above trunk level. In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object, it must be within operating range. If the URPA system is not functioning properly, the display will flash red, indicating that there is a problem. The light will also flash red while driving if a trailer is attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or object is on the back of, or hanging out of your trunk. The light will continue to flash until the trailer or the object is removed and your vehicle is driven forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h). 3-27 It may also flash red if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush or materials such as paint or the system may not work properly. If after cleaning the rear bumper and driving forward at least 15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see your dealer. For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-91. It may also flash red if your vehicle is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). Other conditions that may affect system performance include things like the vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air brakes on a very large truck. As always, drivers should use care when backing up a vehicle. Always look behind you, being sure to check for other vehicles, obstructions and blind spots. Accessory Power Outlets Your vehicle is equipped with accessory power outlets. The outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc. If you have a vehicle with a center storage compartment located on the instrument panel, you may have an accessory power outlet in the storage drawer. There is also an outlet on the front passenger’s seat near the umbrella tray. 3-28 There are two accessory power outlets in the rear seat area located on the door armrests next to the ashtrays. Your vehicle may have a small cap that must be removed to access the accessory power outlet. If it does, when not using the outlet be sure to cover it with the protective cap. The accessory power outlet will only operate when the ignition is in ACCESSORY or ON and for 10 minutes after turning the ignition OFF. If you would like the accessory power outlet to operate regardless of ignition position, and for extended periods of time, see your dealer for more information. Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn off electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum amperage rating. Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem see your dealer for additional information on the accessory power outlets. Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment. Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install. Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only. Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray. Rear Ashtray The ashtrays are located on the door armrests. To use an ashtray, lift the lid. Cigarette Lighter Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is heating will not allow the lighter to back away from the heating element when it is hot. Damage from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the heating element. The cigarette lighter is located near the front ashtray. Front Ashtray Press the lighter all the way in and release it. It will pop back out by itself once the element has heated for use. With the full floor console, the ashtray is located below the climate control system. To open, push down on the cover. To clean the ashtray, lift it out by gripping the sides. Cigarette lighters can be used to provide electrical power to accessories. See Accessory Power Outlets on page 3-28 for more information. For vehicles without the floor console, pull the tray located below the radio to reveal the ashtray. The ashtray can be removed for cleaning. 3-29 Climate Controls Dual Climate Control System With this system you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle. Automatic Operation AUTO (Automatic): When this button is pressed and the temperature is set, the system will automatically control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode and the fan speed. AUTO will appear on the display. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C). Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster. 3-30 If you set the system at the warmest temperature setting, the system will remain in manual mode at that temperature and it will not go into automatic mode. In cold weather, the system will start at reduced fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into your vehicle until warmer air is available. The system will start out blowing air at the floor but may change modes automatically as the vehicle warms up to maintain the chosen temperature setting. The length of time needed for warm up will depend on the outside temperature and the length of time that has elapsed since your vehicle was last driven. 3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of the instrument panel, near the windshield. For more information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section. When your vehicle is first started, the display will show the driver’s temperature setting, the fan speed, the air delivery mode and the outside temperature. When the ENG/MET (English/metric) button on the Driver Information Center (DIC) is pressed, the display will show readings in Fahrenheit or Celsius. Use the ENG/MET button to toggle between them. Manual Operation yMODE z: Pressing the MODE switch and changing the mode cancels automatic operation and places the system in manual mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. To change the current mode, select one of the following: F (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets. * (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then directs most of the remaining air to the floor outlets. Some air may be directed toward the windshield. In automatic operation, cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. 7 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some air directed to the outboard outlets, for the side windows, and a little air directed to the windshield. The MODE switch can also be used to select the floor/defog mode. Information on defogging and defrosting can be found later in this section. y9z (Fan): Press this switch to increase or decrease the fan speed. Pressing this switch cancels automatic operation and places the system in manual mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at the highest setting, the passenger compartment air filter may need to be replaced. For more information, see Passenger Compartment Air Filter on page 3-36 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. ? (Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. When the button is pressed, an indicator light will come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes on. Driver’s Temperature Knob: Press this knob to turn the entire climate control system on or off. Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease the temperature inside your vehicle. 3-31 yPASS TEMP z (Passenger’s Temperature): Press this switch to turn the passengers’ climate control systems on. Press this switch to manually increase or decrease the temperature for the front passenger. PASS OFF (Passenger’s Climate Control): Press this button to turn all passenger climate control systems off. If the passenger’s temperature switch is turned off, the driver’s temperature knob will control the temperature for the entire vehicle. A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to override the automatic system and turn the air-conditioning system on or off. When in AUTO the air-conditioning compressor will come on automatically, as necessary. On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate more efficiently. 3-32 For quick cool down on hot days: 1. Select the vent mode. 2. Select the recirculation mode. 3. Select A/C. 4. Select the coolest temperature. 5. Select the highest fan speed. 6. Open all outlets. Using these settings together for long periods of time may cause the air inside your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off. The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is normal. If your vehicle has the memory option, it can be used to recall your climate control settings. For more information, see Climate Controls Personalization on page 3-39. Sensors There is also a sensor located behind the front grill. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps to maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the temperature. Defogging and Defrosting Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly. There are two modes to clear fog from your windshield. Use the floor/defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode (FRONT) to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. The solar sensor on your vehicle monitors the solar radiation and the air inside your vehicle, then uses the information to maintain the selected temperature by initiating needed adjustments to the temperature, the fan speed and the air delivery system. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be activated, as necessary. Do not cover the solar sensor located in the middle of the instrument panel, near the windshield, or the system will not work properly. yMODE z: Press this button until the floor/defog symbol appears on the display. . (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air equally between the windshield and the floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the floor/defog mode. 3-33 1 FRONT (Defrost): Pressing FRONT directs most of the air to the windshield and the side window outlets, with some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically turn off recirculation and run the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog or frost from the rear window. The rear window defogger will only work when the ignition is in ON. = REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from the rear window as possible. The rear window defogger will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will only run for approximately five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine. 3-34 The heated outside rearview mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the REAR button is pressed. Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window may damage the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear window with sharp objects. Outlet Adjustment Use the lever located in the center of each outlet to change the direction of the airflow. Use the thumbwheel located next to the outlets to turn them on and off. Operation Tips • Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that may block the flow of air into your vehicle. • Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may adversely affect the performance of the system. • Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively. Rear Climate Control System OFF: Turn the mode knob located on the rear climate control panel to this position to turn off the airflow. If the PASS OFF button located on the main climate control panel is pressed, the rear climate control system will be turned off and the settings selected for the main climate control panel will also be selected for the rear seat passengers. For more information on how to use the climate control system, see Dual Climate Control System on page 3-30. For more information on the air outlets, see Outlet Adjustment on page 3-34. Automatic Operation Your vehicle has a rear climate-control system that allows the rear-seat passengers to adjust the direction of the airflow, the fan speed and the temperature for the rear-seating area. This system also works with the main climate-control system in your vehicle. The control panel for this system is located on the back of the center console. yPASS TEMP z: Press this switch located on the main climate control panel in the front of the vehicle on the instrument panel to turn on the system. AUTO (Automatic): Press the MODE button until AUTO appears on the display to place the system in automatic mode. When automatic operation is active, the system will control the inside temperature, the air delivery mode and the fan speed. Manual Operation yMODE z: Pressing this switch cancels automatic operation and places the system in manual mode. Select the AUTO mode to return to automatic operation. To change the current mode, select one of the following: F (Vent): This mode directs air to the upper outlets, with some air directed to the floor outlets. 3-35 * (Bi-Level): This mode directs half the air to the upper outlets, and then directs the remaining air to the floor outlets. 7 (Floor): This mode directs the air to the floor outlets. y9z (Fan): Pressing this switch cancels automatic operation and places the system in manual mode. Press this switch to increase or decrease the fan speed. Press the MODE switch until AUTO is displayed to return to automatic operation. Passenger Compartment Air Filter The passenger compartment air filter traps most of the pollen from the air entering your vehicle. Like your vehicle’s engine air cleaner/filter, it may need to be changed periodically. For how often to change the passenger compartment air filter, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. yTEMP z (Temperature): Press this switch to increase or decrease the temperature for the rear seat passengers. For cool air to be sent to the rear of the vehicle, the air-conditioning system on the main climate-control panel must be on. If it is not on, then the temperature in the rear of the vehicle will remain at cabin temperature. Be sure to keep the area under the front seats clear of any objects so that the air inside of your vehicle can circulate effectively. The access panel for the passenger compartment air filter is located under the hood near the windshield, on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. 3-36 To access the passenger compartment air filter, do the following: 1. Use a tool to gently pry the cover up. If your vehicle has tabs that allow you to unlatch the cover with your fingers, you will not need a tool for this step. 2. Then, insert a tool behind the push pin located on the inboard side of the air filter compartment to carefully pry the pin out. 3-37 Steering Wheel Climate Controls You can adjust the temperature using the steering wheel controls. The control for the temperature is located on the left side of the steering wheel. 3. To remove the air filter, insert a tool between the air filter and the compartment wall on the outboard side of the vehicle. Then, push in to flatten the pin holding the air filter in place. Gently remove the air filter and any loose debris that may be inside the air filter compartment. 4. Insert the new air filter by pushing until you hear a click. Then, reinstall the push pin and snap the cover into place. 3-38 yTEMP z(Temperature): Press the up or down arrow on this control to increase or decrease the temperature. Climate Controls Personalization To change the stored settings, do the following: If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can store and recall climate control settings for the temperature, the fan speed and the direction of the airflow. 1. Select the desired temperature, fan speed and airflow mode. If desired, a separate temperature setting may also be selected for the front seat passenger. For information on how to do this, see Dual Climate Control System on page 3-30. Memory buttons 1 and 2 are located on the driver’s door panel and correspond to the numbers 1 or 2 found on the back of each remote keyless entry transmitter. 2. Locate memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver’s door panel. To recall the climate control settings last stored on your transmitter, press the unlock button on your remote keyless entry transmitter and put the ignition in ACCESSORY or ON. The settings will be recalled. 3. Press the memory button on the door panel that corresponds to the number on the back of the transmitter you are programming, until you hear two beeps. The beeps confirm that your selection has been saved and can now be recalled. For more information on the memory feature, see Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel on page 2-52. Follow these steps each time you want to change the stored settings. 3-39 Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them. Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they are working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens. 3-40 Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there is a problem with your vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They are a big help. Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC) that works along with the warning lights and gages. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-57 for more information. Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using and many of the other things you will need to know to drive safely and economically. Digital Cluster United States and Canada versions shown 3-41 Analog Cluster United States version shown, Canada similar 3-42 Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). You may wonder what happens if a vehicle has to have a new odometer installed. The new one may read the correct mileage. This is because your vehicle’s computer has stored the mileage in memory. Trip Odometer The trip odometer can record the number of miles or kilometers traveled for up to two trips. The trip odometer button is located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. The two trip modes are indicated by Trip A and Trip B. In order to change from one mode to the other, press the A/B portion of the TRIP button. By pressing the bottom of this button, you can tell how many miles have been recorded on either Trip A or Trip B since you last set the odometer back to zero. Press the RESET part of the button until zeros appear to reset each trip mode. If your vehicle is first sold in the United States, the trip odometer will return to zero after 999.9 miles (1 609 km). If your vehicle is first sold in Canada, the trip odometer will return to zero after 1,242 miles (1 999 km). The RESET TRIP A/B button only resets the trip mode (A or B) that is being displayed. Each trip mode must be reset individually. Display Mode On vehicles equipped with the analog cluster, this button is located between the trip odometer and ENG/MET button to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. Press DSPL MODE to turn the backlighting and the digital speed image on and off. On vehicles equipped with the digital cluster, press DSPL MODE to turn the digital displays other than the speedometer and gear display on and off. 3-43 English/Metric Button By pressing this button located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel, you can go back and forth from English (miles) to metric (kilometers). Other readings such as temperature, fuel and trip odometer also go back and forth between English and metric. 3-44 Tachometer (Analog Cluster Only) This gage indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Engine Speed Limiter This feature prevents the engine from operating at too many revolutions per minute (rpm). When the engine’s rpm are critically high, the fuel supply to the engine will shut off. When the engine speed slows, the fuel supply will come on again. This helps prevent damage to the engine. Safety Belt Reminder Light Airbag Readiness Light When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts. There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG or the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-45. The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds. If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will come on briefly, but the chime will not sound. United States Canada (Analog Only) This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready. 3-45 If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away. {CAUTION: If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle, it means the airbag system may not be working properly. The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle. The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. 3-46 Charging System Light When you turn the key to ON or START, this light will come on briefly to show that the generator and battery charging systems are working properly. If this light stays on, you need service and you should take your vehicle to the dealer at once. To save your battery until you get there, turn off all accessories. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60 for more information. Brake System Warning and Parking Brake Indicator Light Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well. If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. Have your brake system inspected right away. This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. {CAUTION: Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-35. When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake does not fully release. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem. 3-47 Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light With the anti-lock brake system, the light(s) will come on when your engine is started and may stay on for several seconds. That is normal. United States If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the light comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See Brake System Warning and Parking Brake Indicator Light on page 3-47. The anti-lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. 3-48 Canada (Analog Only) This warning light should come on briefly when the engine is started. If the warning light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you are driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and your vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons: • If there is a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on. • If the traction control system is affected by an engine-related problem, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on. • If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Engine Coolant Temperature Gage United States (Analog Only) Canada (Analog Only) This light tells you that your engine has overheated. As a check, the light should come on for a few seconds when you start your engine. If this light comes on and stays on, you should stop your vehicle and turn the engine off as soon as possible. A warning chime should also sound if this light comes on. See Engine Overheating on page 5-27. 3-49 This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area, the engine is too hot. Malfunction Indicator Lamp Service Engine Soon Light in the United States or Check Engine Light in Canada Digital Cluster That reading means the same thing as the warning light — the engine coolant has overheated. See Engine Overheating on page 5-27. United States Canada (Analog Only) Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. 3-50 Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after awhile, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good, and your engine may not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty. Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired. This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways: If the Light Is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle: • • • • Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for service as soon as possible. • Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required. • Light On Steady — An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required. 3-51 If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following: Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle? If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water? If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off. Have you recently changed brands of fuel? If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on. 3-52 If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection: Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not working properly. Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This light tells you if there could be a problem with your engine oil pressure. This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection. Oil Pressure Light {CAUTION: Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned. Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or START. It goes off once you start your engine. That is a check to be sure the light works. If it does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn you if something goes wrong. When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through your engine properly. You could be low on oil and you might have some other system problem. Security Light For information regarding this light, see Theft-Deterrent Systems on page 2-19. 3-53 Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light The fog lamps light will come on when the fog lamps are in use. The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 3-18 for more information. This light comes on whenever the cruise control system is in use. It will go out when the system is turned off. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information. Highbeam On Light Lights On Reminder This light will illuminate when the headlamp high beams are in use. United States Canada (Analog Only) See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9. This light comes on whenever the parking lamps are on so that you know that your exterior lamps are on. 3-54 Fuel Gage If the fuel supply gets down to about 1.8 gallons (7 L) of fuel remaining in the tank, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and a single chime will sound. On the digital cluster, if the fuel is less than about 1.2 gallons (4.7 L) the E segment on the gage will flash. The fuel range on the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display LO. Here are a few concerns some owners have had about the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage: • At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before Analog (United States) Analog (Canada) the gage reads full. • GAL FUEL USED on the DIC does not correspond The fuel gage shows approximately how much fuel is in the tank. It works only when the ignition is in ON. exactly to the amount of fuel remaining as shown on the fuel gage. • The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly or accelerate quickly. Digital Cluster 3-55 Fuel Data Display (Digital Cluster Only) The fuel data display tells you all you about the fuel economy and how far you can travel with the fuel remaining. To reset the average fuel economy, press the INFO button until the MPG AVG is displayed on the DIC. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until both the fuel data display and DIC display reads 0.0. The RANGE display shows how far the computer thinks you can travel with the fuel that is in the tank. The computer does not know what driving conditions will be like for the rest of your trip, so the range is estimated based on the recent fuel economy. Therefore, the range reading may change as your driving habits change. Going from city to highway driving may increase the range reading. On the analog cluster, fuel data can be obtained by pressing the INFO button. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-57. The average fuel economy (AVG) display shows the average miles per U.S. gallon. 3-56 Driver Information Center (DIC) This display gives you the status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also used to display driver personalization features and warning/status messages. All messages will appear in the DIC display, located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster. DIC Controls and Displays «INFO ª (Information): Pressing this button up or down will display the MILES RANGE (Analog Cluster), MPG AVG, MPG INST, GAL FUEL USED, AVG MPH, TIMER, BATTERY VOLTS, LF-RF-LR-RR TIRE (if equipped), RPM TACHOMETER (Digital Cluster), ENGINE OIL LIFE, TRANS FLUID LIFE, PHONE (if equipped), FEATURE PROGRAMMING and Blank Display. INFO RESET: Pressing this button will reset the MPG AVG, GAL FUEL USED, AVG MPH, TIMER, ENGINE OIL LIFE and TRANS FLUID LIFE. For more information about the trip odometer, see Trip Odometer on page 3-43. • MPG AVG (Average Miles Per Gallon): This message shows the approximate fuel economy you have averaged since the last time you reset the value. To reset the MPG AVG (Average Fuel Economy), press the INFO button to display the MPG AVG, then press and hold the INFO RESET button until 0.0 MPG AVG is displayed. • GAL (Gallons) FUEL USED: This message shows The Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons are located to the right of the steering wheel on the instrument panel, near the air outlets. how much fuel has been used since the last reset. To learn how much fuel is used from a new starting point, press the RESET button while the GAL FUEL USED is displayed in the DIC. 3-57 • AVG MPH (Average Miles per Hour): This message shows the average speed you have traveled at since the last time you reset the value. To reset the value, press the INFO button to display AVG MPH, then press and hold the INFO RESET button until 0.0 AVG MPH is displayed. • TIMER: This feature is like a stopwatch, in that you can clock the time it takes to get from one point to another. To operate, press the INFO button to display TIMER. Each of the fields for the hours, minutes and seconds are two numeric digits. Once TIMER 00:00:00 is displayed, press the ON/OFF button to start the timing feature. Press the ON/OFF button again to stop it. If you will be starting and stopping your vehicle, during a trip for instance, the TIMER feature will automatically start timing where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it, press and hold the INFO RESET button until the display reads TIMER 00:00:00. Press the INFO button to exit from the TIMER display. 3-58 • ENGINE OIL LIFE: This message shows the percentage of remaining oil life for your vehicle. When the oil life is depleted, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will appear on the display. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 and Oil Life Indicator on page 3-79. In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-17. This only needs to be reset after you have had the oil changed. • TRANSMISSION FLUID LIFE: This message shows the percentage of remaining transmission fluid life for your vehicle. Under normal conditions, the rate of deterioration of the transmission fluid is slow. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for proper fluid and change intervals. To reset the transmission fluid life, press the INFO button to display TRANS FLUID LIFE, then press and hold the INFO RESET button until 100% TRANS FLUID LIFE is displayed. This only needs to be reset after you have had the fluid changed. ON/OFF: Pressing this button turns the Programming and Personalization Features on and off. FEATURE PROGRAMMING must be displayed on the DIC to begin actual programming. This button also starts and stops the timer. MILES RANGE: (Analog Cluster only) This message shows about how many miles you can drive without refilling your fuel tank. Once the range drops below 40 miles (64 km) remaining, the display will show LOW. MPG INST (Instantaneous Miles per Gallon): This message shows the instantaneous fuel economy which varies with your driving conditions, such as acceleration, braking and the grade of the road being traveled. The INFO RESET button does not function in this mode. BATTERY VOLTS: This message shows the current battery voltage. If the voltage is normal, the display will show BATTERY VOLTS OK. If the voltage drops below 10.5 volts, the display will show BATTERY VOLTS LOW. If the voltage is above 16 volts, the display will show BATTERY VOLTS HIGH. If the display shows the high or low message, you will need to have your battery checked. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60 for more information. LF-RF-LR-RR TIRE: On vehicles equipped with the tire pressure monitor, this message shows the tire pressure for each tire (left front, right front, left rear and right rear). Pressing the INFO button will scroll through the tire pressure for each of the four tires, such as: • 34 PSI LF TIRE OK or • 234 kPa LF TIRE OK If a tire pressure is below 25 psi (172 kPa) or above 38 psi (265 kPa), the message will appear as shown above except it will show TIRE LOW or TIRE HIGH as appropriate. If desired, the tire pressure information can be programmed not to appear when using the INFO button to scroll through the DIC displays. See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-68. If a low or high tire pressure is detected by the system while driving, a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will appear in the display. If this occurs, press the INFO button to scroll to the tire(s) with a low or high pressure condition. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60 for more information. ENG/MET (English/Metric): Press this button, located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel, to display information in the English or metric system. 3-59 DIC Warnings and Messages These messages will appear if there is a problem sensed in one of your vehicle’s systems. Vehicles that are first sold in Canada will have a number after each message. This number helps to identify the problem. You must then press INFO or INFO RESET to clear the display screen for further use. However, be sure to take any message that appears on the display screen seriously and remember that pressing the INFO or INFO RESET button will only make the message disappear, not the problem. DIC messages can also be displayed in French, German, Spanish and Japanese. Contact your GM dealer to have the language display adjusted for your vehicle. BATTERY NOT CHARGING – 7: This message will appear if the battery is not being charged. Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer at your earliest convenience. 3-60 BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE – 27: This message is displayed when the vehicle has detected that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable point. The battery saver system will start reducing certain features of the vehicle that you may not be able to notice. At the point that features are disabled, this message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery. Turn off unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge. BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH – 8: This message shows that the electrical charging system is overcharging (more than 16 volts). To avoid being stranded, have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer. You can reduce the charging overload by using the accessories. Turn on the lamps and radio, set the climate control on AUTO and the fan speed on HI, and turn the rear window defogger on. You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts when the engine is running. BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW – 6: This message will appear when the electrical system is charging less than 10 volts or if the battery has been drained. If this message appears immediately after starting, it is possible that the generator can still recharge the battery. The battery should recharge while driving but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using an auxiliary charger (be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions) to boost the battery after returning home or to a final destination. If this message appears while driving or after starting your vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately by your GM dealer to determine the cause of this problem. To help the generator recharge the battery quickly, you can reduce the load on the electrical system by turning off the accessories. You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing the INFO button. The normal range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts. CHANGE ENGINE OIL – 82: This means that the life of the engine oil has expired. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. After an oil change, the oil life indicator must be reset. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-17. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 and Oil Life Indicator on page 3-79 for more information. CHANGE TRANS FLUID – 47: This message will appear when it is time to change the transaxle fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for the proper fluid and change intervals. After the transaxle fluid has been changed, the transaxle fluid change indicator must be reset. See “How to Reset the Transaxle Fluid Indicator” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-21. CHECK BRAKE FLUID – 37: This message will display if the ignition is in ON to inform the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. See Brake System Warning and Parking Brake Indicator Light on page 3-47. CHECK COOLANT LEVEL – 2: This message will appear when there is a low level of engine coolant. Have the cooling system serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24. CHECK FUEL GAGE – 50: (Analog Cluster) This message will appear when the fuel supply is less than 5 gallons (18.9 L) and the display is turned off. A single chime will also sound when this message is displayed. 3-61 CHECK GAS CAP – 61: This message will appear if the gas cap has not been fully tightened. You should recheck your gas cap to ensure that it is on properly. CHECK OIL LEVEL – 36: For correct operation of the low oil sensing system, your vehicle should be on a level surface. A false CHECK OIL LEVEL message may appear if the vehicle is parked on a grade. The oil level sensing system does not check for actual oil level if the engine has been off for a short period of time, and the oil level is never checked while the engine is running. If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears, and your vehicle has been parked on level ground with the engine off for at least 30 minutes, the oil level should be checked by observing the oil dipstick. Prior to checking the oil level, be sure the engine has been off for a few minutes and your vehicle is on a level surface. Then check the dipstick and add oil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14. CHECK TIRE PRESSURE – 144: This message is displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system detects a low or high tire pressure condition in one or more of the road tires. 3-62 By pressing the INFO button up or down, the DIC display will show which tire or tires do not have the correct inflation pressure. The system will display the air pressure, the tire location (LF, RF, RR or LR), and LOW TIRE if the air pressure is low or HIGH TIRE if the air pressure is high. The tire pressure information is available in English or metric measurements. For example, a driver’s side front tire that is low may be shown as: 22 PSI LF TIRE LOW. The correct tire inflation pressure should be set to those shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30 for the location of this label. For more information regarding proper tire inflation, see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65. If a tire is low, you should stop as soon as possible and inspect your tire(s) for damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-76. Once the TPM system detects the low or high tire pressure condition, the message CHECK TIRE PRESSURE will be displayed whenever you start the engine. To remove or clear the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message, you will need to set the tire(s) to the proper tire pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-68 for more information. {CAUTION: When the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message is displayed on the Driver Information Center and the tire pressure is low, your vehicle’s handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers. If you drive too fast, you could lose control of your vehicle. You or others could be injured. Don’t drive over 55 mph (90 km/h) when the tire pressure is low. Drive cautiously and correct the tire pressure as soon as you can. CHECK WASHER FLUID – 25: This message means that your vehicle is low on windshield washer fluid. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36. DRIVER DOOR AJAR – 140: This message will display anytime the key is in ON, the transaxle is not in PARK (P) and the driver’s door is open or ajar. A chime will sound when the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (4.8 km/h). DRIVE NO. X (1 or 2): This message will be displayed with the key in ON and while entering FEATURE PROGRAMMING, but only if the vehicle is equipped with memory seats. The message will show which driver is activating the personalization feature. It will only stay on for five seconds. This message can be customized for you by your GM dealer. ENGINE COOLANT HOT, IDLE ENGINE – 44: This message will appear when the engine coolant temperature is over 262°F (128°C). Stop and allow your vehicle to idle in PARK (P) until it cools down and the message is removed. Do not increase engine speed above a normal idle. If it does not cool down, turn off the engine and have it serviced by your GM dealer before driving it again. Severe engine damage can result from an overheated engine. See Engine Overheating on page 5-27. Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating on page 5-27 for more information. 3-63 ENGINE HOT–AC OFF – 16: This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the A/C operation will automatically resume. You can continue to drive your vehicle. If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired by your GM dealer as soon as possible to avoid compressor damage. ENGINE OVERHEATED, STOP ENGINE – 42: This message will appear when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage. See Engine Overheating on page 5-27. A multiple chime will also sound when this message is displayed. ENGINE POWER REDUCED – 41: This message informs you that the vehicle is reducing engine power because the transaxle is being placed in gear under conditions that may cause damage to the vehicle’s engine, transaxle or ability to accelerate. FUEL LEVEL LOW – 11: This message serves as a warning that the fuel level in the tank is critically low. Stop for fuel soon. A single chime will sound when this message is displayed. 3-64 HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED – 23: If it is dark enough outside and the headlamps and Twilight Sentinel® controls are off, this message will display on the DIC. This message informs the driver that turning on the exterior lamps is recommended even though the DRL are still illuminated. It has become dark enough outside to require the headlamps and/or other exterior lamps. This message will also appear if the optional Rainsense™ wiping feature is on and the Twilight Sentinel® is off. ICE POSSIBLE – 13: This message appears when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions. LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR – 142: The left rear door is open or ajar when this message appears. The ignition must be in ON and the transaxle not in PARK (P) for this message to display. A chime will sound if the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE – 35: If this message appears while the engine is running, stop the engine and do not operate it until the cause of low oil pressure is corrected. Severe damage to the engine can result. A multiple chime will sound when this message is displayed. PASSENGER DOOR AJAR – 141: The right front passenger’s door is open or ajar when this message appears. The ignition must be in ON and the transaxle not in PARK (P) for this message to display. A chime will sound if the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR – 143: The right rear door is open or ajar when this message appears. The ignition must be in ON and the transaxle not in PARK (P) for this message to display. A chime will sound if the vehicle’s speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h). SERVICE AC SYSTEM – 14: This message appears when the electronic sensors that control the air conditioning and heating systems are no longer working. Have the climate control system serviced by your GM dealer if you notice a drop in heating and air conditioning efficiency. SERVICE ELECTRICAL SYS – 106: This message will display if an electrical problem has occurred within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) or the ignition switch. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. SERVICE FUEL SYSTEM – 101: The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has detected a problem within the fuel system when this message appears. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. SERVICE IDLE CONTROL – 107: A problem with the idle control has occurred when this message displays. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. SERVICE AIR BAG – 83: There is a problem with the airbag system when this message appears. Let only a qualified technician work on your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer immediately. SERVICE STABILITY SYS – 54: If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message, it means there may be a problem with your stability enhancement system. If you see this message, try to reset the system (stop, turn off the engine, then start the engine again). If the SERVICE STABILITY SYS message still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see your GM dealer for service. Reduce your speed and drive accordingly. A single chime will also sound when this message is displayed. SERVICE CHARGING SYS – 102: This message will display when a problem with the charging system has been detected. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. SERVICE STEERING – 127: This message is displayed when a problem has been detected in the magnetic speed variable assist steering system. If this message comes on, service is required. See your GM dealer. 3-65 SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS – 84: This message is displayed to indicate that the suspension system is not operating properly. To correct this problem, have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM – 34: This message means there is a problem with the PASS-Key® III system. A fault has been detected in the system which means that the system is disabled and is not protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usually restarts, however, you may want to take your vehicle to your GM dealer before turning off the engine. SERVICE TPM SYSTEM – 51: When this message is displayed, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working properly. See your GM dealer for service. SERVICE TRANSMISSION – 100: See your GM dealer for repair. SERVICE VEHICLE SOON – 3: This message is displayed when a non-emissions related powertrain malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible. SPEED LIMIT TO 90 – 113: A failure in the suspension control system has occurred when this message appears. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) determines the speed to which your vehicle is limited. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer if this message appears. 3-66 STABILITY SYS ENGAGED – 55: You may see the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver Information Center. It means that an advanced, computer-controlled system has come on to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you are steering. This stability enhancement system activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road. When the system is on, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. When the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message is on, you should continue to steer in the direction you want to go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations by making the most of whatever road conditions will permit. If the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message comes on, you will know that something has caused your vehicle to start to spin, so you should consider slowing down. A single chime will also sound when this message is displayed. STARTING DISABLED REMOVE KEY – 33: This message will appear when the PASS-Key® III system detects that an improper ignition key is being used to try to start the vehicle. Check the ignition key for damage. If it is damaged, it may need to be replaced. If it is not damaged, remove the key and try to start the vehicle again. If it still does not start, try another ignition key or see your GM dealer for service. THEFT ATTEMPTED – 40: This message is displayed if the theft system has detected a break-in attempt while you were away from your vehicle. TOP SPEED FUEL CUT-OFF – 111: This message will appear when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) detects that the maximum speed for your vehicle has been reached. The speed of your vehicle will surge as the fuel supply is cut off. Your vehicle’s top speed is based on the top speed rating of the tires. This ensures that your vehicle stays in a safe operating range for the tires. TRACTION ENGAGED – 91: When your traction control system is limiting wheel spin, the TRACTION ENGAGED message will be displayed. Slippery road conditions may exist if this message is displayed, so adjust your driving accordingly. This message will stay on for a few seconds after the traction control system stops limited wheel spin. TRACTION OFF – 89: This message will be displayed after the traction control system has been turned off using the TRAC ON/OFF button on the center console. TRACTION READY – 90: This message informs the driver that the traction control system is available. Pressing the TRAC ON/OFF button on the center console once turns the traction control system off. Pressing the button again turns the system back on. This message will automatically disappear from the display after five seconds. TRACTION SUSPENDED – 56: This message displays when the traction control system has been temporarily shut off because your vehicle’s brakes have overheated. This message does not indicate a problem with your vehicle’s traction control system. After a few minutes, the traction control system will be available again and the TRACTION READY message will appear. TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE – 112: This message indicates that the transaxle fluid in your vehicle is too hot. Stop and allow your vehicle to idle until it cools down or until this message is removed. TRUNK OPEN – 24: This message indicates that the trunk is open when the ignition is on. TURN SIGNAL ON – 20: If you drive your vehicle for more than a mile with a turn signal on, this message will appear as a reminder to turn off the turn signal. A multiple chime will sound when this message is displayed. VEHICLE OVERSPEED – 52: This message is displayed when the vehicle speed exceeds a certain limit as required by some export countries. A continuous chime will sound when this message is displayed. 3-67 Climate Controls and Radio System Personalization These features allow both drivers to personalize their own climate control settings as well as their radio settings. For more information, see Climate Controls Personalization on page 3-39 and Radio Personalization with Home and Away Feature on page 3-102. If your vehicle is equipped with the ability to program additional personalization features, the driver’s preferences are recalled by pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by pressing the appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on the driver’s door. Certain features can be programmed not to recall until the key is placed in the ignition. To change feature preferences you must use one of the following procedures. DIC Vehicle Personalization Entering Feature Programming Your vehicle is equipped with personalization capabilities that allows you to program certain features to a preferred setting for up to two people. The number of programmable features varies depending upon which model of the vehicle is purchased. On all vehicles, features such as climate control settings, radio preset settings, exterior lighting at unlock, remote lock and unlock confirmation, and automatic door locks have already been programmed for your convenience. Some vehicles are equipped with additional features that can be programmed including the seat position, steering column position (if equipped) and outside mirror position. The navigation screen preferences (if equipped) will remain at the last set position. 3-68 To enter feature programming mode, do the following: 1. Turn the ignition to ON, making sure the vehicle is in PARK (P). 2. If your vehicle has memory settings, press the appropriate memory button, 1 or 2, located on the driver’s door panel. The DIC display will show either 1 or 2 depending on which button was selected. Make sure the number on the DIC display matches the number on the back of your key fob. 3. Press the INFO button until FEATURE PROGRAMMING appears on the DIC display. 4. Press the ON/OFF button to enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING. Remote Recall Memory 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you will have this feature. This feature recalls any previously programmed seat and mirror controls when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. The telescoping steering column (if equipped) will return to its programmed position when the key is inserted in the ignition switch and turned to ON. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Programmable Modes Key in Recall Memory Mode 1: ON If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you will have this feature. This feature recalls any previously programmed seat and mirror controls when the key is inserted into the ignition. The telescoping steering column (if equipped) will return to its programmed position when the key is inserted in the ignition switch and turned to ON. Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until REMOTE RECALL MEMORY appears on the DIC display. 3-69 Programmable Modes Auto Exit Seat Mode 1: ON If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you will have this feature. This feature will move the driver’s seat to the previously programmed exit position when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until KEY IN RECALL MEMORY appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. 3-70 Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until AUTO EXIT SEAT appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Auto Exit Steering Wheel If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you may have this feature also. This feature will move the steering column to the driver’s previously programmed exit position when the ignition is turned off and the driver’s door is opened. Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Lights Flash at Unlock This feature allows the parking lamps to flash twice when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle. All doors must be closed, and the lamps will not flash if the manual parking lamps or headlamps are active. Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until AUTO EXIT STRG WHEEL appears on the DIC display. 3-71 Programmable Modes Lights Flash at Lock Mode 1: ON This feature allows the parking lamps to flash once when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature to work, and the lamps will not flash if the manual parking lamps or headlamps are active. Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. 3-72 Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Horn Sounds at Lock This feature sounds the horn once when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. All doors must be closed for this feature to work. Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Exterior Lights at Unlock This feature turns on the exterior lamps when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle. The lamps will remain on for about 20 seconds unless a door is opened, the ignition is turned to ACCESSORY, ON or START or the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle. 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until HORN SOUNDS AT LOCK appears on the DIC display. 3-73 Programmable Modes Doors Lock in Gear Mode 1: ON With the ignition in ON and all the doors closed, this feature allows the vehicle’s doors to automatically lock when the driver shifts the transaxle out of PARK (P). Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. 3-74 Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until DOORS LOCK IN GEAR appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Driver Unlock in PARK (P) This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P). All other doors will remain locked until the unlock button on either front door armrest or on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Driver Unlock Key Off This feature allows the driver’s door to automatically unlock when the ignition key is turned to OFF. All other doors will remain locked until the unlock button on either front door armrest or on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until DRIVER UNLOCK KEY OFF appears on the DIC display. 3-75 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Doors Unlock in PARK (P) Doors Unlock Key Off This feature will automatically unlock all doors when the vehicle is shifted in to PARK (P). This feature will automatically unlock all doors when the ignition key is turned to OFF. Programmable Modes Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK appears on the DIC display. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until DRIVER UNLOCK KEY OFF appears on the DIC display. 3-76 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Mirror to Curb In Reverse If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you will have this feature. This feature will move the passenger’s outside rearview mirror to a curb view position when the shift lever is placed in REVERSE (R), and it will return the mirror to the last known driving position when the shift lever is moved out of REVERSE (R). See Outside Curb View Assist Mirror on page 2-41 for more information. Programmable Modes Mode 1: ON Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 2. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until MIRROR TO CURB IN REV appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. Tire Pressure Display This feature will allow the individual tire pressure readings to be displayed when using the INFO button to scroll through the DIC displays. Even with this feature programmed to be turned off, a low or high tire pressure condition will still cause the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message to be displayed on the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60 for more information. 3-77 Programmable Modes Driver’s Name Set/Recall Mode 1: ON If your vehicle has the optional memory package, you will have this feature. This feature allows individual driver’s names to be displayed in the DIC when the ignition is turned to ON. This feature only works when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle or when buttons 1 or 2 on the driver’s door are pressed. See your dealer for assistance in programming this feature. Mode 2: OFF Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, it was programmed to Mode 1. The mode to which the vehicle was programmed may have been changed since it left the factory. To determine the mode to which the vehicle is programmed or to program the vehicle to a different mode, do the following: 1. Enter FEATURE PROGRAMMING following the instructions listed previously. 2. Press the down arrow on the INFO button until TIRE PRESSURE DISPLAY appears on the DIC display. 3. To turn on the feature, press the ON/OFF button until ON appears on the DIC display. To turn it off, press the ON/OFF button until OFF appears on the display. The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit the programming mode by following the instructions later in this section or program the next feature available on your vehicle. 3-78 Exiting Feature Programming To exit FEATURE PROGRAMMING, press the INFO RESET or INFO button. Trip Computer Oil Life Indicator This feature lets you know when to change the engine oil. It is based on the engine oil temperatures and your driving patterns. To see the display, press the INFO button several times until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears. If you see 99% ENGINE OIL LIFE, 99 percent of your current oil life remains. The DIC may display a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message. If you see CHANGE ENGINE OIL, it means the oil life is gone. For more information, see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 and Engine Oil on page 5-14. Audio System(s) Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can be added, it is very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly. Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find out what your audio system can do, and how to operate all of its controls. Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-25 for more information. When the oil is changed, you will need to reset the system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-17. Always keep a written record of the mileage and date when you changed your oil. 3-79 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) Radio with CD Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display. Display the time with the ignition off by pressing one of these buttons. Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears on the display. Display the time when the ignition is off by pressing HR or MN. To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold HR and MN at the same time until TIME UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not available from the station, NO STATION TIME will appear on the display. RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for the time to update. 3-80 XM™ Satellite Radio Service XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). Playing the Radio PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume. Finding a Station BAND: Press this button to switch between weather, FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will show the selection. ¦TUNE SEEK ¥: This button can be pressed to two positions. Press this button to the first position to tune to the next or to the previous frequency. If this button is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio will continue tuning until this button is released. Press this button to the second position and release it to go to the next or to the previous radio station and stay there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, play for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press this button again to stop scanning. To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play for five seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning presets. The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. Setting Preset Stations Up to 36 stations (six weather, six FM1, six FM2, six AM, and six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following steps: 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND to select weather, FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds, the station that was set will return. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. When battery power is removed and later applied, the radio preset stations will not need to be reset. 3-81 Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, TREBLE, or MIDRANGE appears on the display. The radio keeps separate tone settings for each band, preset, and source. − LEVEL +: After selecting the desired tone control, press the plus or minus button to select the desired level. To save the tone settings for your presets, press and hold the numbered pushbutton for the desired preset for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) M (Speaker): Press and release this button until BALANCE or FADE appears on the display. − LEVEL +: After selecting the desired control, press the plus or minus button to select the desired level. PTY (Program Type): This button is inoperable on this radio, except if your radio is equipped with XM™ Satellite Radio Service. 3-82 Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station (XM™ Only) To select and find a desired PTY perform the following: 1. Press PTY to activate program type select mode. PTY will appear on the display. 2. Press LEVEL to select a PTY. 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either TUNE SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to the PTY’s first station. 4. To go to another station within that PTY, press TUNE SEEK once to display the PTY, then press TUNE SEEK again to go to another station. 5. Press PTY to exit program type select mode. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go back to Step 1. SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing the following: 1. Press PTY to activate program type select mode. PTY will appear on the display. 2. Press LEVEL to select a PTY. 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press SCAN, and the radio will begin scanning the stations in the PTY. 4. Press SCAN to stop at a station. XM™ Radio Messages Radio Display Message Condition Action Required XL (Explicit Language Channels) XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language. These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No XM signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM Acquiring channel audio (after 4 second delay) The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed. This message should disappear shortly. Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another channel. Channel Unavail Channel no longer available This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset button. No Artist Info Artist Name/Feature not available No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Title Info Song/Program Title not available No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. 3-83 XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Message Condition Action Required No CAT Info Category Name not available No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. Not Found No channel available for the chosen category There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. No Information No Text/Informational message available No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received after having the vehicle serviced, check with your dealer. XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service. Unknown Radio ID not known (should only be if hardware failure) If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer. Check XM Receiver Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer. 3-84 Playing a CD Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. If the ignition and the radio are on and the underlined CD symbol appears on the display, the CD will begin playing. A CD may be loaded with the radio off but it will not start playing until the radio is on. If you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first press the eject button. If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a known good CD. Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught in the CD player. If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” later in this section. { RW (Rewind): Press and hold the left arrow to reverse the CD. Release it to return to playing speed. FF | (Fast Forward): Press and hold the right arrow to fast forward to another part of the CD. Release it to return to playing speed. ¦TUNE SEEK ¥: Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous track. 1–6: Press this button to go to the next CD loaded in the Glovebox-Mounted CD Changer. See Glovebox-Mounted CD Changer on page 3-99 for more information. RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to listen to the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display. Press RDM to turn off random play. RDM will disappear from the display. 3-85 SCAN: Press this button to listen to tracks for a few seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this button again to stop scanning. SOURCE: Press this button to select a CD when listening to the radio. A CD must be loaded to play. If a CD is not loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the display. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when listening to the CD. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. Z (Eject): Press this button to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject may be activated with the radio and the ignition off. CD Messages If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons: • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. • There may have been a problem while burning the CD. • The label may be caught in the CD player. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio display an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. 3-86 Radio with Cassette and CD This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and will only work when the information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio station. While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station name or call letters will appear on the display instead of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and the name of the program being broadcast. XM™ Satellite Radio Service Radio Data System (RDS) The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. With RDS, the radio can do the following: • Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous Untied States. XM™ offers 100 coast to coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). programming • Receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies • Display messages from radio stations • Seek to stations with traffic announcements. 3-87 Playing the Radio Finding a Station PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on and off. BAND: Press this button to select weather, FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will show the selection. VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume. AVC (Automatic Volume Control): With AVC, the audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road or wind noise as you drive. To use AVC, press and hold the TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL OFF appears on the display. Then press the LEVEL plus symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROL ON will appear on the display. AVC VOLUME will appear on the display any time you adjust the volume while AVC is on. To turn AVC off, press and hold the TONE button until AUTO VOLUME CONTROL ON appears on the display. Then press the LEVEL minus symbol. AUTO VOLUME CONTROL OFF will appear on the display. ¦TUNE SEEK ¥: This button can be pressed to two positions. Press this button to the first position to tune to the next or to the previous frequency. If this button is held at the first position for a few seconds, the radio will continue tuning until this button is released. Press this button to the second position and release it to go to the next or to the previous radio station and stay there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. SCAN: Press this button for less than two seconds to scan radio stations. The radio will go to a station, play for five seconds, then go on to the next station. Press this button again to stop scanning. To scan preset stations, press and hold SCAN for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to the first preset station, play for five seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press SCAN again to stop scanning presets. The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. 3-88 Setting Preset Stations Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) The RDS PTY mode must be off to set preset stations. Up to 36 stations (six weather, six FM1, six FM2, and six AM, six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped), can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the following steps: TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, TREBLE, or MIDRANGE appears on the display. The radio keeps separate tone settings for each band, preset (except weather band presets), and source. 1. Turn the radio on. 2. Press BAND to select weather, FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2. 3. Tune in the desired station. 4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered pushbutton is pressed for less than two seconds, the station that was set will return. 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton. When battery power is removed and later applied, you will not have to reset the radio presets. − LEVEL +: After selecting the desired tone control, press the plus or minus button to select the desired level. To save the tone settings for the presets, press and hold the numbered pushbutton for the desired preset for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) TONE: Press and release this button until BALANCE or FADE appears on the display. − LEVEL +: After selecting the desired control, press the plus or minus button to select the desired level. To save the tone settings for the presets, press and hold the numbered pushbutton for the desired preset for more than two seconds until you hear a beep. 3-89 Using Digital Signal Processing (DSP) DSP: This feature is used to provide a choice of four different listening experiences: talk, front seat, ambience, and spacious. DSP can be used while listening to the radio, cassette, CD, or XM™. Press this button to turn DSP on. Press and release this button until the desired selection appears on the display. To turn DSP off, press and hold this button until DSP OFF appears on the display. When DSP OFF appears on the display, the system will provide the best overall audio performance. The radio keeps separate DSP settings for each band (except weather, which is always set to talk), preset, and source. TALK: This setting should be used when listening to non-musical material such as news, talk shows, sports broadcasts, and books on tape. Talk makes spoken words sound very clear. FRONT SEAT: This setting adjusts the audio to give the driver the best possible sound qualities. Front seat can be used at any time for any material. Rear seat passengers in the vehicle may not get the same effect. AMBIENCE: This setting is used to enhance the stereo effect. SPACIOUS: This setting is used to make the listening space seem larger. 3-90 Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station (XM™ Only) To select and find a desired PTY perform the following: 1. Press PTY to activate program type select mode. PTY will appear on the display. 2. Press LEVEL to select a PTY. 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either TUNE SEEK arrow to select the PTY and to take you to the PTY’s first station. 4. To go to another station within that PTY, press TUNE SEEK once to display the PTY, then press TUNE SEEK again to go to another station. 5. Press PTY to exit program type select mode. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go back to Step 1. If both PTY and TA are on, the radio will search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements. SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing the following: 1. Press PTY to activate program type select mode. PTY will appear on the display. 2. Press LEVEL to select a PTY. 3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press SCAN, and the radio will begin scanning the stations in the PTY. 4. Press SCAN to stop at a station. RDS Messages ALERT!: Alert warns of local or continental U.S.-based emergencies. When an alert announcement comes on the current radio station or a related network station, ALERT will appear on the display. You will hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or a cassette tape or a CD is playing, or if RDS mode is turned off. To increase or to decrease the volume, turn the PWR/ VOL knob. TA VOLUME will appear on the display while the volume is being adjusted. If the radio tunes to a related network station for an alert announcement, it will return to the original station when the announcement is finished. If a cassette tape or CD is playing, play will stop during the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be turned off. ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency broadcast system. This feature is not supported by all RDS stations. MSG (Message): If the current station has a message, MSG will appear on the display. Press this button, to see the message. The message may display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc. If the entire message does not appear on the display, parts of the message will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the message, press and release the MSG button. A new group of words will appear on the display after every press of the MSG button. Once the complete message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from the display until another new MSG is received. 3-91 For XM™ (if equipped), press the MSG button while in XM mode to retrieve four different categories of information related to the current song or channel: Artist Name/Feature, Song/Program Title, Channel Category. When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC STATION FOUND will appear on the display. Each of the four information types may have multiple pages of text. To reach a category, press and release the MSG button repeatedly until the desired type is displayed. If there are multiple pages of text for the information selected type, the radio will automatically display all the pages for that type at a rate of about one page every three seconds before timing out and returning to the default display. You may override this feature by pressing the MSG button to review all of the pages at your own pace. If TA is on the display, press the TA button to turn off the traffic announcements. TA (Traffic): If TA appears on the display, the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station you will hear it. If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements, press the TA button and the radio will seek to a station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and TA will appear on the display. 3-92 The radio will play the traffic announcement even if the volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a cassette tape or CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio Service. XM™ Radio Messages Radio Display Message Condition Action Required XL (Explicit Language Channels) XL on the radio display, after the channel name, indicates content with explicit language. These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no action is required. This process should take no longer than 30 seconds. No XM signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM Acquiring channel audio (after 4 second delay) The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed. This message should disappear shortly. Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another channel. Channel Unavail Channel no longer available This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset button. No Artist Info Artist Name/Feature not available No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Title Info Song/Program Title not available No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. 3-93 XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d) Radio Display Message Condition Action Required No CAT Info Category Name not available No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. Not Found No channel available for the chosen category There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. No Information No Text/Informational message available No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your GM dealer. XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service. Unknown Radio ID not known (should only be if hardware failure) If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer. Check XM Receiver Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer. 3-94 Playing a Cassette Tape The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject button to remove the tape and start over. If the ignition and radio are off, press the eject button or the RCL knob to insert and to begin play of a tape. If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. While the tape is playing, use the VOL, TONE, LEVEL, and DSP controls just as you do for the radio. Other controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show an underlined tape symbol. TAPE PLAY will appear on the display when a tape is playing, with an arrow to indicate which side of the tape is playing. Your cassette tape player automatically reduces background noise. Dolby® Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits” later for more information. The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or chrome tape is inserted. If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape Messages” later in this section. 1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous selection on the tape. 2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for next to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape. 3 { RW (Rewind): Press this pushbutton to quickly rewind the tape. The radio will play while the tape rewinds. Press this pushbutton again to return to playing speed. 4 FF | (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly fast forward the tape. The radio will play while the tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to playing speed. 3-95 ¦SEEK ¥: The tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for SEEK to work. Press the up or the down arrow to seek to the next or to the previous selection on the tape. SCAN: Press this button to listen to each selection for a few seconds. The tape will go to the next selection, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning. SOURCE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or CD when listening to the radio. Available loaded sources are shown on the display. If a source is being used, it will be underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the display. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a cassette tape or CD. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. SIDE: Press this button to play the other side of the tape. Z (Eject): Press this button, located to the right of the cassette tape slot, to stop a tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not playing. Eject may be activated with the radio and the ignition off. Cassette tapes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first. 3-96 Cassette Tape Messages If an error occurs while trying to play a cassette tape, it could be for one of the following reasons: • The cassette tape is tight and the cassette player cannot turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, the tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure the player is working properly. • The tape is broken. Try a new tape. • The tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape. CLEAN TAPE: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-104. If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good cassette. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem. Playing a CD 1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the previous track on the CD. Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first press the eject button or push the RCL knob. 2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track on the CD. If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on the display. As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display. The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner. If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a known good CD. 3 { RW (Rewind): Press this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track. Release it to return to playing speed. 4 FF | (Fast Forward): Press this pushbutton to fast forward quickly within a track. Release it to return to playing speed. 6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to listen to the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display. Press RDM to turn off random play. RDM will disappear from the display. ¦SEEK ¥: Press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous track. SIDE: Press this button to play a CD when listening to the radio. Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught in the CD player. If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages” later in this section. 3-97 SCAN: Press this button to listen to each track for a few seconds. The CD will go to a track, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next track. Press this button again to stop scanning. SOURCE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or CD when listening to the radio. Available loaded sources are shown on the display. If a source is being used, it will be underlined on the display. If none of the audio sources are loaded, NO SOURCE LOADED will appear on the display. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a cassette tape or CD. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. CD Messages If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons: • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. Z (Eject): Press this button, located to the right of the CD slot, to stop a CD when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject may be activated with the ignition and radio off. • There may have been a problem while burning the CD. • The label may be caught in the CD player. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your GM dealer when reporting the problem. 3-98 Navigation/Radio System Glovebox-Mounted CD Changer Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system that includes Radio Data System (RDS) with Program Type (PTY) selections that will seek out the kind of music you want to listen to and XM™ Satellite Radio Service capabilities (if equipped). The radio can also communicate with the navigation system to broadcast announcements on traffic, weather, and emergency alert communications. For information on how to use this system, see the “Navigation System” manual. With the CD changer, you can play up to six CDs continuously. Normal size CDs may be played using the trays supplied in the magazine. The smaller 3 inch (8 cm) CDs can be played only with specially designed trays. You must first load the magazine with CDs before you can play a CD. Each of the six trays holds one CD. Load the trays from bottom to top, placing a CD in the tray label side up. If you load a CD label side down, the CD will not play and an error will occur. Repeat this procedure for loading up to 6 CDs in the magazine. 3-99 Once you have loaded the CDs in the magazine, slide open the door of the CD changer. Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on top of the magazine. Close the door by sliding it all the way to the right. When the door is closed, the changer will begin checking for CDs in the magazine. This will continue for up to one and a half minutes, depending on the number of CDs loaded. Whenever a CD magazine with CDs is loaded in the changer, the CD changer symbol will appear on the radio display. If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the CD symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play. When a CD begins playing, a CD and track number will appear on the display. The CD numbers are listed on the front of the magazine. The features of the CD changer may be different due to your vehicles audio system. 3-100 1 PREV (Previous) / ¦TUNE SEEK ¥: Press this pushbutton or the up arrow to go to the previous track on the CD. If playing the first track of the CD, press this pushbutton or the up arrow to go to the last track of the CD. 2 NEXT / ¦TUNE SEEK ¥: Press this pushbutton or the down arrow to go to the next track on the CD. If playing last track of the CD, press this pushbutton or the down arrow to go to the first track of the CD. 3 { RW / { RW (Rewind): Press and hold this pushbutton to reverse quickly within a track. 4 FF | / FF | (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to advance quickly within a track. 5 CD / 5: Press this pushbutton to select the next CD in the changer. Each time you press this button, LOADING will appear on the display and the CD number on the radio display will go to that of the next available CD. 6 RDM / RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM will appear on the display. Press the PREV or NEXT pushbuttons while RDM is on the display to randomly seek through CDs. Press RDM again to turn off random play. This feature may not be available on your radio. SCAN: Press this button to hear the first few seconds of the first track on each CD. SCAN will appear on the display and the CD will mute while scanning. Press this button again to stop scanning. SOURCE: Press this button to play a cassette tape or CD when listening to the radio. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when playing a CD. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. EJECT: Slide the CD changer door all the way open. Press the EJECT button and the magazine will eject. 3-101 CD Messages CD CHANGER ERROR: This message may appear on the display for one of the following reasons: • It is very hot. When the temperature returns to normal, the CD should play. • You are driving on a very rough road. When the road becomes smoother, the CD should play. • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down. • The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again. • There may have been a problem while burning the CD. • The label may be caught in the CD player. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem. 3-102 Radio Personalization with Home and Away Feature If your vehicle has this feature, DRIVER 1 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS or DRIVER 2 (HOME or AWAY) PRESETS will appear on the display when the radio is first turned on. This feature allows the driver to return to the last used audio source: radio, cassette, or CD, using the remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature can also store and recall AM and FM presets, volume, tone, and the last selected radio station. The number on the back of each transmitter, 1 or 2, corresponds to driver 1 or 2. If transmitter 1 is used to enter the vehicle, the last used audio source and/or settings set by driver 1 will be recalled. If transmitter 2 is used to enter the vehicle, the last used audio source and/or settings set by driver 2 will be recalled. The settings can also be recalled by pressing the memory seat buttons 1 or 2 located on the driver’s door. Your radio can store home and away presets. Home and away presets allow you to use one set of preset radio settings in the area where you live, and another set when you go out of town. You will not need to reprogram the presets every time you travel. With the radio off and the time displayed, use fast forward and reverse to select home or away presets. To select the away presets, press and hold FF for five seconds until you hear a beep. The next time the radio comes on, the away presets will be active. To select the home presets, press and hold RW for five seconds until you hear a beep. The next time the radio comes on, the home presets will be active. Audio Steering Wheel Controls Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the following: When battery power is removed and later applied, you will not have to reset the home radio presets because the radio remembers them. However, you will have to reset the away radio presets. Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate. If the radio is removed from your vehicle, the original VIN in the radio can be used to trace the radio back to your vehicle. With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate if stolen. y VOL z (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow to increase or to decrease the volume. y SEL z (Select): When listening to the radio or to an XM™ Satellite Radio Service station, press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or the previous radio station programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio will only seek to stations with a strong signal that are in the selected band. When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or the previous selection. When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or the previous track. 3-103 Radio Reception Cellular Phone Usage AM Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference is an increased level of static while listening to the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off. The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static can occur on AM stations caused by things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise. FM Stereo FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. XM™ Satellite Radio Service XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may display NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference. 3-104 Weather Band Weather band is restricted to speech and the audio quality is not as good as with the AM or FM bands. Depending on location, the radio should receive one or two channels. Care of Your Cassette Tape Player A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player. The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every 50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN TAPE to indicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player. For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealer. The broken tape detection feature of the cassette tape player may identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps: 1. Turn the ignition on. 2. Turn the radio off. 4. Turn the radio on and insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette. 5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time. After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken tape detection feature will be active again. A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning cassette is not recommended. After the player is cleaned, press and hold the eject button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN TAPE indicator. The radio will display CLEAN TAPE MSG CLEARED to show the indicator was reset. Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before the tape player is serviced. 3. Press and hold the SOURCE button for two seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash three times. 3-105 Care of Your CDs Diversity Antenna System Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge. The AM-FM antennas are located in the windshield and rear window. Make sure that the inside surfaces of the windshield and rear window are not scratched and that the grid lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception. Also, for proper radio reception, the antenna connector located on the passenger’s side top corner of the windshield and the antenna connector located on the driver’s side top corner of the rear window need to be properly attached to the buttons on the glass. Be sure never to touch the side without writing when handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. Care of Your CD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism. 3-106 Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception. Any damage caused to your backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by your warranty. Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the front windshield and rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception. If static is heard on the radio, when the rear window defogger is turned on, it could mean that a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line must be repaired. If adding an aftermarket cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antennas are not damaged. Make sure the cellular telephone antenna does not touch a grid line. 3-107 ✍ NOTES 3-108 Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2 Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2 Drunken Driving .............................................4-2 Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5 Braking .........................................................4-5 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6 Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8 Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8 Continuous Variable Road Sensing Suspension (CVRSS) .................................4-10 Steering ......................................................4-10 Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12 Passing .......................................................4-13 Loss of Control .............................................4-14 Driving at Night ............................................4-16 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17 City Driving ..................................................4-20 Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21 Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22 Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23 Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-23 Winter Driving ..............................................4-25 If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-29 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-30 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-30 Towing ..........................................................4-35 Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-35 Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-35 Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-37 4-1 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive defensively. Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life. Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 1-7. Drunken Driving Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means “always expect the unexpected.” Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year. Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes. Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly. 4-2 Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: • • • • Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured. According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka. Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem. The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things: • The amount of alcohol consumed • The drinker’s body weight • The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking • The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol 4-3 It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level. There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks. The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent. The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them. 4-4 But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater! The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision. There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. Braking {CAUTION: Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road. Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time. Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. But that is only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important. And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied. 4-5 Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. 4-6 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid. When you start your engine and begin to drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves a little. This is normal. If there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system, this warning light will stay on. See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-48. The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard. Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS: A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels. As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. 4-7 Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti-lock brakes. Using Anti-Lock Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may hear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal. Braking in Emergencies With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking. 4-8 Traction Control System (TCS) Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. The TRACTION ENGAGED message will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the traction control system is limiting wheel spin. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60. You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal. If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on page 3-12. To turn the system off, press the TRAC ON/OFF button located on the center console. For vehicles with a column shift lever, the button is located at the end of the shift lever. United States Canada This warning light will come on to let you know if there is a problem with your traction control system. See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-48. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to. You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-30 later in this section. The TRACTION OFF message will display on the Driver Information Center. If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button, the TRACTION OFF message will display – but the system will not turn off right away. It will wait until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The TRACTION READY message should display briefly on the Driver Information Center. 4-9 The traction control system monitors the front brake rotor temperature. If the traction control system comes on while the front brake rotors are hot due to heavy use of braking or previous traction control, the TRACTION SUSPENDED message will be displayed – but the system will not turn off right away. It will wait until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. The TRACTION READY message should appear when the brake rotors are no longer hot and the traction control system will resume normal operation. Steering Continuous Variable Road Sensing Suspension (CVRSS) This system continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds. Your vehicle may have a Continuous Variable Road Sensing Suspension (CVRSS). CVRSS automatically adjusts the ride of your vehicle. Automatic ride control is achieved through a computer used to control and monitor the suspension system. The controller receives input from various sensors to determine the proper system response. If the controller detects a problem within the system, the DIC will display a SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS message. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60 for more information. If this message appears, have your vehicle serviced at your dealership. Steering Tips 4-10 Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort. Magnetic Speed Variable Assist Steering System Driving on Curves It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here is why: Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this. The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control. Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. Steering in Emergencies What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down. If you have Stabilitrak®, you may see the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver Information Center. See “Stability Sys Engaged Message” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60. Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will want to go slower. There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem. Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available. If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead. 4-11 Off-Road Recovery You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving. An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-12 If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two-lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver? Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision. So here are some tips for passing: • Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time. • Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic. • Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance. • When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity. • If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot. 4-13 • Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is. • Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle. • Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn. • If you are being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right. 4-14 Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems — brakes, steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked. In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger. Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal. If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs. If you have Stabilitrak®, you may see the STABILITY SYS ENGAGED message on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See “Stability Sys Engaged Message” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60. Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited. While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid. 4-15 Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving. • Drive defensively. • Do not drink and drive. • Since you cannot see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles. • Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead. • In remote areas, watch for animals. • If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest. No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old. Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. 4-16 What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible. You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps. Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly. Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are not even aware of it. Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement. 4-17 The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even people walking. It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts. Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you hit them. 4-18 {CAUTION: Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning. Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining. Driving Through Deep Standing Water Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly. Driving Through Flowing Water {CAUTION: Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. If you try to drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. Some Other Rainy Weather Tips • Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray. • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 5-57. 4-19 City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving: • Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross-country trip. • Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You will save time and energy. See Freeway Driving on page 4-21. • Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it. When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light. One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals. 4-20 Freeway Driving The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane. At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow. Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass. Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal. Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules. Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot. Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. 4-21 Expect to move slightly slower at night. When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit. The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are. Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you are not fresh — such as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in. Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you will find experienced and able service experts in GM dealerships all across North America. They will be ready and willing to help if you need it. 4-22 Here are some things you can check before a trip: • Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside? • Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape? • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels? • Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean? • Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure? • Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system? • Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps? Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever. There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured. What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen. Then here are some tips: • Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior. • Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently. Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain. • If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service, or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency. 4-23 If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. {CAUTION: • Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill. levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system, and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads. • Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill. {CAUTION: If you do not shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope. • Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to • • • 4-24 a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better. Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane. As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action. Winter Driving Here are some tips for winter driving: • Have your vehicle in good shape for winter. • You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk. Also see Tires on page 5-57. Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle. 4-25 Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction. However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be very careful. What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there. Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution. Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction control system, you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may want to turn the traction control system off, such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. 4-26 Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti-lock braking system, you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-6. If You Are Caught in a Blizzard • Allow greater following distance on any slippery road. • Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers. If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe: • Turn on your hazard flashers. • Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow. 4-27 • Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you. If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm. {CAUTION: Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there. Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind. This will help keep CO out. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful. 4-28 Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while. Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes. If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck, but you must use caution. {CAUTION: If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer. Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-30. For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-75. 4-29 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Loading Your Vehicle First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. You should turn your traction control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-35. It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification label. 4-30 {CAUTION: Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Tire and Loading Information Label The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-57 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65. There is also important loading information on the Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification Label” later in this section. Label Example A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. If you have a Professional Vehicle, a Tire and Loading Information label specific to your vehicle will be provided and installed by the final body manufacturer. The Tire and Loading Information label, should be attached to the B-pillar of your vehicle. See the final stage manufacturer’s manual or contact them directly. The label shows the original tires installed on your professional vehicle and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for those tires. The label also tells you the professional vehicle’s capacity weight. 4-31 Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-37 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips. 4-32 Example 1 Item A B C Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = Total 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg) 700 lbs (317 kg) Example 2 Item A B C Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = Available Cargo Weight = Example 3 Total Item 1,000 lbs (453 kg) A 750 lbs (340 kg) B 250 lbs (113 kg) C Description Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = Available Cargo Weight = Total 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 1,000 lbs (453 kg) 0 lbs (0 kg) Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. 4-33 Certification Label If your vehicle is a Professional Vehicle, the vehicle specific Certification label is provided by the final stage manufacturer. The coach-builder should be consulted if the final stage manufacturer’s label is not present. The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR label should be on the driver’s door edge. If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Do not carry more than 203 lbs (92 kg) in the trunk of your non-professional vehicle. {CAUTION: A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door. This label shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. 4-34 Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. {CAUTION: Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. • Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a trunk, put them as far forward as you can. Try to spread the weight evenly. • Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. • Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. Automatic Level Control Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See Roadside Service on page 7-5. If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome), see Recreational Vehicle Towing following. Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”). With the proper preparation and equipment, many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following. This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the load changes. It is automatic, you do not need to adjust anything. 4-35 Here are some important things to consider before you do recreational vehicle towing: Dolly Towing • What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s recommendations. • How far will you tow? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow. • Do you have the proper towing equipment? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations. • Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-22. Dinghy Towing Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed, you should use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section for more information. 4-36 Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To tow your vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps: 1. Put the front wheels on the dolly. 2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P). 3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key. 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position. 5. Release the parking brake. Towing a Trailer The Cadillac Professional Vehicle cannot tow a trailer. {CAUTION: If you do not use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. That is the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer. Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What is more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements. 4-37 If You Do Decide To Pull a Trailer Weight of the Trailer If you do, here are some important points: • There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. • Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls. • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. • Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. • Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer. Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts. How heavy can a trailer safely be? Three important considerations have to do with weight: • The weight of the trailer • The weight of the trailer tongue • The total weight on your vehicle’s tires 4-38 It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle. It should never weigh more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg). These are total maximum weights including the load. But even that can be too heavy. The maximum trailer weight for your vehicle can be determined from the Gross Combined Vehicle Weight (GCVW). The GCVW = curb weight + passenger’s weight + cargo weight + trailer weight. The GCVW should never be more than 7,200 lbs (3 273 kg). You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at: Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 33169 Detroit, MI 48232-5169 In Canada, write to: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30 for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity. If you are using a weight-carrying hitch or a weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 to15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer. Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. 4-39 Hitches Safety Chains It is important to have the correct hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow: You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. • The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper. • Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-35. Dirt and water can, too. Trailer Brakes Because you have anti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do, both brake systems will not work well, or at all. If you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailer brakes. Be sure to follow the instructions that come with the trailer or from the brake manufacturer. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be able to maintain them properly. 4-40 Driving with a Trailer Passing Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Before setting out for the open road, you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself. You will need more passing distance up ahead when you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane. Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform, parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time. Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working. Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns. Backing Up Making Turns When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. 4-41 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn, change lanes or stop. When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving on Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well. On long uphill grades, reduce speed to 45 to 50 mph (70 to 90 km/h) and avoid prolonged use of SECOND (2) gear and engine speeds above 3800 rpm. 4-42 Climbing grades steeper than four percent at temperatures above 90°F (32°C) with a loaded vehicle and trailer is not recommended. The cooling system may temporarily overheat. See Engine Overheating on page 5-27. Parking on Hills {CAUTION: You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is how to do it: 1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into PARK (P). 2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then shift into PARK (P) firmly and apply your parking brake. 5. Release the regular brakes. When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you: Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you are pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (do not overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a good idea to review this information before you start your trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight. Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on page 5-27. • Start your engine, • Shift into a gear, and • Make sure the parking brake has released. 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. 4-43 ✍ NOTES 4-44 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care Service ............................................................5-3 Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle ......................................................5-5 Fuel ................................................................5-5 Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5 Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5 California Fuel ...............................................5-5 Additives .......................................................5-6 Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6 Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10 Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10 Hood Release ..............................................5-11 Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12 Engine Oil ...................................................5-14 Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-17 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-19 Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-21 Engine Coolant .............................................5-24 Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-27 Engine Overheating .......................................5-27 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ........................................5-29 Cooling System ............................................5-30 Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35 Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36 Brakes ........................................................5-37 Battery ........................................................5-40 Jump Starting ...............................................5-42 Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-48 Headlamp Horizontal Aiming ...........................5-49 Headlamp Vertical Aiming ..............................5-50 Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-51 Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-51 Headlamps ..................................................5-51 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Parking and Cornering Lamps .......................................5-55 Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-56 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-56 Tires ..............................................................5-57 Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-58 Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-62 Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-65 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-68 Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-69 When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-70 Buying New Tires .........................................5-71 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-72 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-73 Wheel Replacement ......................................5-73 Tire Chains ..................................................5-75 5-1 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-76 Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-77 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-78 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire ................................................5-80 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-85 Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-86 Appearance Care ............................................5-87 Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-87 Vinyl ...........................................................5-89 Leather .......................................................5-89 Instrument Panel ..........................................5-89 Interior Plastic Components ............................5-89 Wood Panels ...............................................5-89 Speaker Covers ............................................5-90 Glass Surfaces .............................................5-90 Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-90 Weatherstrips ...............................................5-90 Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-91 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-91 Finish Care ..................................................5-92 5-2 Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-92 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ................5-93 Tires ...........................................................5-94 Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-94 Finish Damage .............................................5-94 Underbody Maintenance ................................5-94 Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-94 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-95 Vehicle Identification ......................................5-96 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-96 Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-96 Electrical System ............................................5-97 Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-97 Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-97 Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-97 Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-97 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-98 Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-98 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ..........................5-101 Capacities and Specifications ........................5-106 Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. 5-3 Doing Your Own Service Work If you want to do some of your own service work, you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11. Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-54. You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14. 5-4 {CAUTION: You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it. • Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task. • Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Gasoline Specifications Fuel It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications which were developed by automobile manufacturers around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasoline. Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. California Fuel Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle. Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher. However, for best performance and for trailer towing, you may wish to use middle grade or premium unleaded gasoline. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-50. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty. 5-5 Additives To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing your emission control system to work properly. In most cases, you should not have to add anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier. Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage the plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under your warranty. 5-6 Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for service. Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your warranty. To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving. Filling Your Tank {CAUTION: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off your engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle — this is against the law in some places. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. 5-7 The fuel door release button is located to the left of the steering wheel next to the exterior lamp control. The button only works when the vehicle is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), the key is in the ignition and the VALET lockout button is in OFF. An alternate fuel door release is located inside of the trunk on the driver’s side of the vehicle. Pull it to release the fuel door. 5-8 To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left (counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door. {CAUTION: If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-91. When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right (clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-50. The CHECK GAS CAP message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will be displayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed. {CAUTION: If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-50. 5-9 Filling a Portable Fuel Container Checking Things Under the Hood {CAUTION: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others: • Dispense gasoline only into approved containers. • Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground. • Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. • Do not smoke while pumping gasoline. 5-10 {CAUTION: An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. {CAUTION: Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Hood Release To lift the hood, use the following steps: 1. Pull the lever inside the vehicle to open the hood. It is located on the lower left side of the instrument panel. Vehicle without Night Vision shown 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the secondary hood release lever. The lever is located under the bottom edge of the grille. Move the release lever and raise the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly. 5-11 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood, here is what you will see: 5-12 A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36. B. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-98. C. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-27 and Cooling System on page 5-30. D. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering Fluid on page 5-35. E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-14. F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-14. G. Brake Master Cylinder. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes on page 5-37. H. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Cap and Dipstick. See Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-21. I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. 5-13 Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the instrument cluster, it means you need to check your engine oil level right away. For more information, see “CHECK OIL LEVEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60. You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder. 5-14 1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. When to Add Engine Oil Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove it. If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106. Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are through. Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for two things: • GM6094M Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. 5-15 • SAE 5W-30 As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). You should look for this information on the oil container, and use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. 5-16 Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty. GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures. Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will need for good performance and engine protection. Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you must reset the system every time the oil is changed. When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on. Change your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. 5-17 How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) being turned on, reset the system. After the oil has been changed, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message must be reset. To reset the message, do the following: 1. Turn the key to the ON position without starting the engine. 2. Press the INFO button on the Driver Information Center (DIC) until ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. 3. Press and hold the INFO RESET button until 100% ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. This resets the oil life indicator. 4. Turn the key to OFF. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure. 5-18 The percentage of oil life remaining may be checked at any time by pressing the INFO button until ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed on the DIC. For more information on the oil life indicator, see Oil Life Indicator on page 3-79. What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the filter, do the following: See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter. When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after 50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required. 1. Loosen and remove both wing screws on the top of the engine air cleaner/filter cover. 2. Lift up the outboard side of the cover at an angle while pulling toward you. This is necessary due to the three tabs located on the rear of the cover. 5-19 2. Push the cover slightly down and towards the engine to engage the tabs in the slots and align the two wing screws. 3. Engage and tighten the two wing screws on the top of the engine air cleaner/filter housing cover. {CAUTION: 3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element and any loose debris that may be found in the air cleaner base. Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. 4. Inspect or replace the air filter element. Follow these steps to reinstall the cover to the engine air cleaner/filter housing: 1. Align the three tabs located on the back of the cover with the three slots on the back of the housing. 5-20 Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. Automatic Transaxle Fluid How to Check When to Check and Change Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department. A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed. Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: • In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. • In hilly or mountainous terrain. • When doing frequent trailer towing. • Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service. • Use such as limousine service. If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require change until the message CHANGE TRANS FLUID appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check the transaxle fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving: • • • • When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C) At high speed for quite a while. In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather. While pulling a trailer. To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C). Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to drive longer. 5-21 Checking the Fluid Level Prepare you vehicle as follows: • Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running. • With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P). • With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P). Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: The transaxle fluid cap is located next to the radiator hose and below the engine air cleaner/filter assembly on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. • Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes. 1. After removing the engine air cleaner/filter assembly to reach the transaxle fluid cap, turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again. 5-22 How to Add Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. 3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the cross-hatched area. 4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way and turn the handle clockwise. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter assembly. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on the dipstick. 1. Pull out the dipstick. 2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill. Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by your warranty. Always use automatic transaxle fluid labeled DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification. 3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check,” earlier in this section. 4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way and turn the handle clockwise. 5-23 How to Reset the Transaxle Fluid Indicator After the transaxle fluid has been changed, the transaxle fluid change indicator must be reset. To reset the indicator, do the following: 1. Press the INFO button on the Driver Information Center (DIC) until TRANS FLUID LIFE is displayed. 2. Press and hold the RESET button until 100% is displayed. This resets the transaxle fluid change indicator. The percentage of transaxle fluid life remaining may be checked at any time by pressing INFO on the DIC until the TRANS FLUID LIFE message appears. Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant. 5-24 The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 5-27. A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant will: • • • • • Giving freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C). Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C). Protect against rust and corrosion. Help keep the proper engine temperature. Let the warning lights and gages work as they should. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. What to Use Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do not need to add anything else. {CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. If you have to add coolant more than two times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system. Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful. 5-25 Checking Coolant {CAUTION: Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure cap — even a little — when the engine and radiator are hot. The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark, located on the side of the surge tank that faces the engine. The engine coolant surge tank is located toward the rear of the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. For more information on location, see Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12. 5-26 If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and stays on, it means you are low on engine coolant. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60 for more information. Adding Coolant If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the engine is cool. {CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. When replacing the pressure cap, make sure the arrow lines up with the tube. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. Engine Overheating You will find an ENGINE COOLANT HOT, IDLE ENGINE message or an ENGINE OVERHEATED, STOP ENGINE message displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60 for more information. You will also hear a chime. There is also an engine temperature warning light and/or gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light on page 3-49 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-49. 5-27 If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine {CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-29 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. 5-28 Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-29 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine An overheat warning, along with a low coolant message, can indicate a serious problem. If you get an engine overheat warning with no low coolant message, but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you: • • • • Climb a long hill on a hot day. Stop after high-speed driving. Idle for long periods in traffic. Tow a trailer. If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so: 1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle. 2. Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting and fan speed and open the windows as necessary. If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come back on, you can drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away. If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine condition exists and the message ENGINE OVERHEATED, STOP ENGINE is displayed, an overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine performance. This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided. Notice: After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-14. You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away. 5-29 Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what you will see: {CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle should be parked on a level surface. A low coolant level should be indicated by a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message on the Driver Information Center (DIC). If it is, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system. A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans 5-30 {CAUTION: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. Notice: Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-29 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may cause premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle. If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service. 5-31 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible but the level is not 4.5 inches (11.4 cm) below the top of the filler neck, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for more information. 5-32 If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as follows: {CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap. {CAUTION: Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture. {CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. 5-33 1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise (left) until it first stops. Do not press down while turning the pressure cap. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Then keep turning the cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap. 5-34 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark on the side of the coolant surge tank. Start the engine and allow it to warm up. If the CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message does not appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), coolant is at the proper fill level. If a CHECK COOLANT LEVEL message does appear, repeat Steps 1 to 3 then reinstall the pressure cap, or see your dealer. Power Steering Fluid 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fans. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches about 4.5 inches (11.4 cm) from the top of the filler neck. 5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the arrow on the pressure cap lines up with the tube. The power steering fluid reservoir is located next to the underhood fuse block on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. 5-35 How to Check Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid To check the power steering fluid, do the following: What to Use 1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark. What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals. 5-36 When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid The CHECK WASHER FLUID message will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid is low. Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location. Notice: • When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water. • Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water does not clean as well as washer fluid. • Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full. Brakes Brake Fluid Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir location and access. • Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not work at all. 5-37 So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid. Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. {CAUTION: If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. If the ignition is in ON and the brake fluid is low, the CHECK BRAKE FLUID message will be displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-60. 5-38 What to Add When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir. {CAUTION: With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid. Notice: • Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid. • If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance Care on page 5-87. Brake Wear Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly. {CAUTION: The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced. Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torque specifications. Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. 5-39 Brake Pedal Travel Battery See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble. Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear. Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system — for example, when your brake linings wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts. 5-40 The battery is located under the rear seat cushion. To access the battery, see Rear Underseat Fuse Block on page 5-101. You do not need to access the battery to jump start your vehicle. See Jump Starting on page 5-42. {CAUTION: A battery that is not properly vented can let sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear seat cushion. These fumes can damage your rear seat safety belt systems. You may not be able to see this damage, and the safety belts might not provide the protection needed in a crash. If a replacement battery is ever needed, it must be vented in the same manner as the original battery. Always make sure that the vent hose is properly reattached before reinstalling the seat cushion. To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached to the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery, and the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the floor pan (E). 5-41 Vehicle Storage Jump Starting If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down. If you cannot start your vehicle and you are unable to remove your key from the ignition, see “Shift Lock Release” under Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-28. {CAUTION: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent Feature on page 3-103. If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. {CAUTION: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: • They contain acid that can burn you. • They contain gas that can explode or ignite. • They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. 5-42 Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your warranty. Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage your vehicle. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle. Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and other accessories when jump starting your vehicle. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio! 2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems. To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake. 5-43 4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on the other vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal. The remote positive (+) terminal is located in the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. A second remote positive (+) terminal is located on the rear underseat fuse block. Lift the red plastic cap to access the terminal. The remote negative (−) terminal is located near the power steering fluid reservoir. It is marked GND (−). See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location. You will not see the battery of your vehicle under the hood. It is located under the rear passenger’s seat. You will not need to access the battery for jump starting. The remote positive (+) terminal is for that purpose. 5-44 {CAUTION: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. {CAUTION: {CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. 5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 5-45 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remote positive (+) terminal location on the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal location of the vehicle with the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal location of the vehicle with the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end of the cable touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery. 5-46 9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal marked GND (−). 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service. Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery. 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. 5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its original position. Jumper Cable Removal A. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND) 5-47 Headlamp Aiming Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx® socket or T15 Torx® screwdriver. Notice: To make sure your headlamps are aimed properly, read all the instructions before beginning. Failure to follow these instructions could cause damage to headlamp parts. The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows: • The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat surface. • The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system which may be equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aim has been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment. This is true even though your horizontal aim indicators (if equipped) may not fall exactly on the “0” (zero) marks on their scales. If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers (for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe your headlamps need to be re-aimed, we recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer for service. However, it is possible for you to re-aim your headlamps as described in the following procedure. 5-48 level surface which is level all the way to the wall or other flat surface. • The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface. • The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud attached to it. • The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done. • The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on the driver’s seat. • Tires should be properly inflated. Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low-beam lamps. The high-beam lamps will be correctly aimed if the low-beam lamps are aimed properly. The headlamp aiming devices are located under the hood near the headlamps. If you believe your headlamps need horizontal (left/right) adjustment, follow the horizontal aiming procedure. If you believe your headlamps need only vertical (up/down) adjustment, follow only the vertical aiming procedure. Headlamp Horizontal Aiming If your vehicle has the horizontal aim indicators, turn the horizontal aiming screw (A) until the indicator (B) is lined up with zero. Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the vertical aim. 5-49 Headlamp Vertical Aiming Notice: Horizontal aiming must be performed before making any adjustments to the vertical aim. Adjusting the vertical aim first will result in an incorrect headlamp aim. 1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam lamps. 2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on each lamp; if left low beam, subtract 2 inches (5 cm). Record this distance. 5-50 3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2 and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of the vehicle. 4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps. Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up which may cause damage to the headlamp. 5. Place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only the beam of light from the headlamp being aimed to be seen on the flat surface. 6. Turn the vertical aiming screw (C) until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line. 7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for the opposite headlamp. Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-56. For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. Halogen Bulbs {CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. Headlamps 1. Remove all of the push-pins that hold the filler panel cover in place by pressing in the center of each pin and then pulling up on the outer circle. 5-51 2. Remove the two bolts at the top of the headlamp assembly. 3. Loosen the bolt at the bottom of the headlamp assembly. 5-52 4. Use a tool to help pry the headlamp assembly away from the vehicle. 6. Remove the bulb socket dust cover. 5. Firmly grasp the outboard side of the headlamp assembly with both hands and pull hard enough so that the whole assembly separates from the vehicle. 7. Turn the headlamp housing socket counterclockwise to unlock the socket from the lamp housing. 5-53 8. Pull the old bulb out of the socket. To reinstall the filler panel, do the following: 1. Place the filler panel in the correct location. 2. Reset each push-pin by holding each by the outer circle while pushing up on the pin assembly from below. The center portion of the push-pin should now be above the outer circle. 3. After placing each push-pin into the opening, press down on the outer circle until it is seated against the surface of the filler panel. 4. Lock each push-pin in place by pressing the center of each down until it is level with the outer circle. Use care not to press down so far that the push-pin releases again. 9. Install the new bulb into the socket. Make sure that the bulb is locked in firmly. 10. Reinstall the headlamp housing socket into the headlamp assembly. 11. Reinstall the headlamp assembly by reversing Steps 2 through 6. 5-54 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Parking and Cornering Lamps 1. The turn signal lamps are located beside the headlamp bulbs. To access, lift off the bulb socket dust cover. See Steps 1 through 6 under Headlamps on page 5-51. 3. Remove the turn signal lamp housing socket and replace the bulb. 4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the lamp assembly. 2. Press the tab down and turn the housing socket clockwise to unlock the socket from the lamp housing. 5-55 Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Cornering Lamps Front Turn Signal Headlamps, Lower High-Beam Upper Low-Beam To replace the wiper blade assembly, do the following: Bulb Number 3157 3157 1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY and turn the wipers on. Position the wipers on the windshield in the mid-wipe position. Then with a door open, turn the ignition to OFF. 9005 9006 For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer. Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected each time maintenance is performed. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information on wiper blade inspection. It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper windshield wiper blade length and type, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13. 5-56 2. Tip the blade up almost to a T position and push down on the tab to release the wiper blade assembly. 3. To install, align the wiper blade with the loop on the wiper blade assembly, and push up to snap it into place. Tires CAUTION: Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle’s owner’s manual. • Underinflated tires pose the same danger • {CAUTION: • Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. • Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. CAUTION: (Continued) • as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact— such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure. Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65, for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving. (Continued) 5-57 Tire Sidewall Labelling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Passenger Car Tire Example 5-58 (D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72. (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Compact Spare Tire Example (A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-86 and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-76. (B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. 5-59 (C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-86 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. (E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65. (F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description. The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only. (G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. 5-60 Light Truck Tire Example (A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration. Tire Size The following illustration shows an example of a tire size. (D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. (E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single. For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65. (A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U. S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide. 5-61 (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction. (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches. (F) Service Description: These characters represent the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z. Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kiloPascal (kPa). Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. 5-62 Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65. Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. 5-63 Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-70. 5-64 UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight. Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Inflation - Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: • • • • • • Premature or irregular wear For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. How you load your vehicle affects the vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry. Poor handling When to Check Reduced fuel economy Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to check the spare tire. If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-86 Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you can get the following: • • • • A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch. This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity. Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride Needless damage from road hazards 5-65 How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) that sends tire pressure information to the Driver Information Center (DIC). Using the DIC control buttons, the driver is able to check tire pressure levels in all four road tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-68 and DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-57 for additional information. 5-66 High Speed Operation {CAUTION: Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained high-speed driving, causes excessive heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have a crash and you or others could be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions are such, that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high speed operation, in excellent condition and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load. If your vehicle has P225/60R16 97S or P235/55R17 98H size tires and you will be driving at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal, set the cold inflation pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the tire sidewall, or 38 psi (265 kPa), whichever is lower. See the example following. When you end this high-speed driving, return the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. Example: You’ll find maximum load and inflation pressure molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press. For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for high-speed driving at 38 psi (265 kPa). Professional Vehicle The proper inflation of the tires on your professional vehicle depends on the type of tires on it. • If your vehicle has P235/60R17EL 103S size tires, the cold inflation pressure is 41 psi (284 kPa). • If your vehicle has LT235/60R17E 112S size tires, the cold inflation pressure depends on the vehicle mass and should be determined by the vehicle coach-builder. A tire and loading information label provided by the final stage manufacturer should be attached to the B-pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the final stage manufacturer’s label is not present, the coach-builder should be consulted. Do not use the tire pressures indicated on the General Motors label. These tire pressures are for the incomplete vehicle and are not the correct tire pressures for the completed professional vehicle. Operation at inflation pressures below this recommendation may cause your tires to become overloaded. 5-67 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system, it uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted on each road wheel, transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the trunk. Tire pressure status and tire pressure warnings are shown on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-57, for details regarding DIC controls and displays. The system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry and Science Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 5-68 Changes or modifications to this system by anyone other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. If the TPM system detects low tire pressure, below 25 psi (172 kPa), or high tire pressure, above 38 psi (262 kPa), a message, CHECK TIRE PRESSURE, will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) display. By pressing the INFO button, the DIC screen will show which tire(s) has the low or high pressure condition. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65 for information regarding correct tire inflation. If a tire is low, you should stop as soon as possible and check all your tires for damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-76. Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors. Once a low or high tire pressure condition is detected, the TPM system will display the CHECK TIRE MESSAGE each time the engine is started, until the tire(s) are set to the correct inflation pressure. The Tire-Loading Information Label, which is located on the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressure for the tires on your vehicle. The TPM system also allows the driver to check the air pressure status of each road tire using the Driver Information Center (DIC). Each tire’s air pressure will be listed individually, in the following order: LF (left front or driver’s side front tire), RF (right front or passenger’s side front tire), RR (right rear or passenger’s side rear tire) and LR (left rear or driver’s side rear tire). See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-65 for information regarding correct tire inflation. Also, see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-57 for information on the DIC controls and displays. If the DIC display does not show tire pressures or the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message appears, see your dealer for service. The TPM system may not work properly while the compact spare tire is installed. Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-70 and Wheel Replacement on page 5-73 for more information. The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4. Anytime you replace one or more tires or rotate your tires, the TPM system will need to be reset. A special tool is needed to reset the sensor identification codes. See your dealer for service. Your vehicle was delivered from the factory with aluminum valve stem caps. If you ever have to replace the valve stem caps on your vehicle, you should replace them with aluminum or plastic caps. The TPM system can alert you about a low or high tire pressure condition, but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tires on page 5-57. When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Do not include the compact spare tire, if your vehicle has one, in your tire rotation. 5-69 After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. Vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system will need to have the sensors reset after a tire rotation is performed. A special tool is needed to reset the sensor identification codes. See your dealer for service. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106. When It Is Time for New Tires One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. {CAUTION: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-77. 5-70 You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true: • You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. • You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. • The tire has a bump, bulge or split. • The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. Buying New Tires To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle needs, look at the tire and loading information label. For more information about this label and its location on your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. {CAUTION: The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow). Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your compact spare temporarily, it was developed for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-86. If you ever replace your tires with those not having a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires. {CAUTION: If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle. 5-71 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Treadwear Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. 5-72 Traction – AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature – A, B, C Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can sometimes be repaired. See your GM dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your GM dealer will know the kind of wheel you need. 5-73 Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle. {CAUTION: Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis. If your vehicle is a professional model, the wheels have a unique offset and bolt hole diameter. Each of the wheels on the professional vehicle have eight wheels nuts. The wheels on the non-professional vehicle have five wheel nuts. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-77 for more information. Used Replacement Wheels Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. 5-74 {CAUTION: Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel. Tire Chains {CAUTION: If your vehicle has P235/55R17, LT235/60R17E or P235/60R17/EL size tires, do not use tire chains, there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than P235/55R17, LT235/60R17E or P235/60R17/EL size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the front tires. 5-75 If a Tire Goes Flat It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road if possible. 5-76 {CAUTION: Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. The jack provided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire. If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely. Changing a Flat Tire When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers. {CAUTION: Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P). 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. The following information will tell you next how to use the jack and change a tire. To be even more certain the vehicle will not move, you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire, on the other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle. 5-77 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you will need is in the trunk. The instructions for changing a tire is on the inside of the tire cover located in your trunk. To gain access to the instructions, spare tire and jacking equipment, do the following: 1. Press the area at the front of the handle located on the cover so that the back edge raises. 5-78 2. Grab the handle and remove the cover. 3. Turn the wing nuts to remove the container that holds the wrench and jack. The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and the wheel wrench (B). 4. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and compact spare tire from the trunk. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-86 for more information. 5-79 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheel nuts. Do not remove them yet. Models with Center Wheel Cover 1. For models having aluminum wheels with a center wheel cover, use the flat end of the wheel wrench to gently pry the wheel covers off. Be careful not to scratch the aluminum wheel edge and do not try to remove it with your hands. For models having wheel nuts exposed, use the wheel wrench to remove the wheel nut covers. 5-80 {CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. {CAUTION: 3. Find the jacking location from the diagram above and corresponding hoisting notches located in the plastic molding. The front location is (A) 8.5 inches (21 cm) from the rear edge of the front wheel well, and the rear location (B) is 3.5 inches (8.5 cm) from the front edge of the rear wheel well. The notches may also be labeled “JACK” with an arrow pointing to the jacking location on the vehicle. Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. 4. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the jack lift head until the jack fits under the vehicle. 5-81 5. Raise the jack until the metal flange fits firmly into the channel of the jack head. 6. Put the compact spare tire near you. 7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the vehicle. 8. Remove all wheel nuts and take off the flat tire. 5-82 {CAUTION: {CAUTION: Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident. 11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub. 9. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel. 10. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface. 5-83 {CAUTION: 12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106 for wheel nut torque specification. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-106 for the wheel nut torque specification. 5-84 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools {CAUTION: 5-Wheel Nuts 8-Wheel Nuts 13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown. If your vehicle is equipped with wheel nut covers, screw them on with your fingers, then tighten one-quarter turn with the wheel wrench. Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare. Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover and lug nut caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced. Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. After you have put the compact spare tire on your vehicle, you will need to store the flat tire in your trunk. Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible. Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment in the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised until the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack. The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as you can. See the storage instructions label for information on how to properly position and store the compact spare tire. 5-85 The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed again. Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle. Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles. A. Wrench B. Jack C. Jack Container D. Retainer E. Compact Spare Tire Cover Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. 5-86 And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together. Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on your compact spare. Appearance Care Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled in a closed space. When anything from a container is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning the inside. Never use these to clean the vehicle: • • • • • • • • • Gasoline Benzene Naphtha Do not use any of these products unless this manual says you can. In many uses, these will damage the vehicle: • • • • Alcohol Laundry Soap Bleach Reducing Agents Fabric/Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth. Carbon Tetrachloride GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Acetone Here are some cleaning tips: Paint Thinner Turpentine Lacquer Thinner Nail Polish Remover They can all be hazardous — some more than others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too. • • • • Always read the instructions on the cleaner label. Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set. Carefully scrape off any excess stain. Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn. • To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set. 5-87 Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To clean, use the following instructions: 1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For solids: remove as much as possible and then vacuum or brush. 2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water. 3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric too wet. 4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to avoid a ring effect. 5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. 6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth. 7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the club soda water instructions given earlier in this section. 4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to avoid a ring effect. Special Fabric Cleaning Problems 5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled. Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee, egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine, and blood can be removed using the club soda water instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry. 6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth. Using Cleaner on Fabric 1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not affect the color of the fabric. 2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For solids: remove as much as possible and then vacuum or brush. 3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to the fabric. 5-88 Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth. 1. Carefully scrape off excess stain. 2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely. 3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on Fabric” instructions described earlier. Vinyl Instrument Panel Use warm water and a clean cloth. Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions. • Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This may have to be done more than once. • Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product. Leather Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. • For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. • Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather. Interior Plastic Components Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish. Wood Panels Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately with a clean cloth. • Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather. 5-89 Speaker Covers Care of Safety Belts Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with just water and mild soap. Keep belts clean and dry. Glass Surfaces Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95. Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner. 5-90 {CAUTION: Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather frequent application may be required. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. Washing Your Vehicle The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention, and durability. The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95. Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that does not have enough clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you could damage your vehicle. Verify with the manager of the car wash that your vehicle will fit before entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-91. 5-91 Finish Care Windshield and Wiper Blades Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-95. If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade or windshield. The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather, and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible. 5-92 Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water. Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water. Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn. Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels. Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only. Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application. Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels. 5-93 Tires Underbody Maintenance To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner. Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on your vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle. Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer’s body and paint shop. 5-94 At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you. Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing the following products. Description Description Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks, fine scratches, and other light surface contamination. Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches and protects finish. Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss Cleans, shines, and protects in one step. No wiping necessary. Wash Wax Concentrate Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans and lightly waxes. Biodegradable and phosphate free. Spot Lifter Quickly removes spots and stains from carpets, vinyl, and cloth upholstery. Odor Eliminator Odorless spray odor eliminator used on fabrics, vinyl, leather and carpet. Usage Polishing Cloth Wax-Treated Interior and exterior polishing cloth. Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil, and asphalt. Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome or stainless steel. White Sidewall Tire Cleaner Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls. Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery, and convertible tops. Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints. Chrome and Wire Wheel Cleaner Removes dirt and grime from chrome wheels and wire wheel covers. Finish Enhancer Removes dust, fingerprints, and surface contaminants. Spray on and wipe off. Usage See your General Motors parts department for these products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. 5-95 Vehicle Identification Engine Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts. Service Parts Identification Label You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label, you will find the following: • • • • VIN Model designation Paint information Production options and special equipment Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle. This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. 5-96 Electrical System Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-54. Headlamp Wiring Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart. A fuse powers the wiper motor. If the fuse blows, there is an electrical problem. Be sure to have it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and power seats. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away. The headlamp wiring system has four individual fuses. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens, have the headlamp wiring checked right away. 5-97 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If a fuse should blow, see your dealer for service immediately. If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same amperage. Pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can. The fuses are located in two fuse blocks, one located in the engine compartment, and the other under the rear seat. If a fuse should blow, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately. 5-98 Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located next to the engine on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. For more information on location, see Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12. To access the fuses, push in the two tabs located at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off. Fuses Fuses Usage Usage 10 Headlamp High Beam Left 11 Ignition 1 12 Fog Lamps (Option) 13 Transmission 14 Cruise Control 15 Coil Module (Option) 16 Injector Bank #2 17 Not Used 18 Not Used 19 Powertrain Control Module Ignition 1 Assembly Line Diagnostic Work 20 Oxygen Sensor 2 Accessory 21 Injector Bank #1 3 Windshield Wipers 22 Cigar Lighter #2 4 Not Used 23 Cigar Lighter #1 5 Headlamp Low Beam Left 24 Daytime Running Lamps 6 Headlamp Low Beam Right 25 Horn 7 Instrument Panel 26 Air Conditioner Clutch 8 Powertrain Control Module Battery 42 Not Used 9 Headlamp High Beam Right 43 Not Used 5-99 Fuses Relays Usage 44 Anti-Lock Brake System 31 Horn 45 Air Pump 32 Air Conditioner Clutch 46 Cooling Fan 1 33 AIR Control Valve (Option) 47 Cooling Fan 2 34 Heated Steering Wheel (Option) 48 Spare 35 Accessory 49 Spare 36 Starter 1 50 Spare 37 Cooling Fan 1 51 Spare 38 Ignition 1 52 Spare 39 Cooling Fan Series/Parallel 54 Heated Steering Wheel (Option) 40 Cooling Fan 2 Relays 5-100 Usage Usage 27 Headlamp High Beam 28 Headlamp Low Beam 29 Fog Lamps (Option) 30 Daytime Running Lamps Circuit Breakers 41 Usage Starter Miscellaneous 53 Fuse Puller Usage Rear Underseat Fuse Block The rear fuse block is located under the rear seat on the driver’s side. The rear seat cushion must be removed to access the rear fuse block. Removing the Rear Seat Cushion Notice: If you touch the exposed wires with the metal on the seat cushion, you could cause a short that could damage the battery and or wires. Avoid contact between the rear seat and the fuse center whenever you remove or reinstall the rear seat. Do not remove covers from any of the covered parts, and do not store anything under the seats. To remove the rear seat cushion, do the following: 1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the front hooks. To access the fuse block, push in the two tabs located at each end of the fuse block cover. Then lift the cover off. 2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the vehicle. 5-101 To reinstall the rear seat cushion, do the following: CAUTION: (Continued) If the safety belt has not been routed through the seat cushion at all, it will not be there to work for the next passenger. The person sitting in that position could be badly injured. After reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and are not twisted. 1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt, then route the safety belts through the proper slots in the seat cushion. Do not let the safety belts get twisted. 2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the seatback so the rear-locating guides hook into the wire loops on the back frame. 3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and then press down on the seat cushion until the spring locks on both ends engage. {CAUTION: A safety belt that is not properly routed through the seat cushion or is twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. CAUTION: 5-102 (Continued) 4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly routed and that no portion of any safety belt is trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat cushion is secured. Fuses 8 Usage Supplemental Inflation Restraint 9 SDAR (XM™ Satellite Radio) 10 Lamps Park Right 11 Fuel Tank Ventilation Solenoid 12 Ignition 1 13 Interior Lamp Dimmer Module 14 Sunshade 15 Navigation 16 Heated Seat Left Front Fuel Pump 17 Interior Lamps 2 Heater, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Battery 18 Right Rear Door Module 19 Stoplamps 3 Memory Seat, Tilt and Telescoping Steering 20 Park/Reverse 4 RR Lumbar, Antenna 21 Audio 5 Driver Door Module 22 Retained Accessory Power for Sunroof 6 Heated Seat Left Rear 23 Lamps, Parking Left 7 Power Tilt and Telescoping Steering 24 Night Vision Fuses 1 Usage 5-103 Fuses 5-104 Usage Fuses Usage 25 Passenger Door Module 61 Rear Defog 26 Body 62 HVAC Blower 27 Export Lights, Power Locks 63 Audio Amplifier 28 Rear HVAC Blower 64 29 Ignition Switch Automatic Level Control Compressor, Exhaust 30 Turn Signal, Hazard Signal 65 Not Used 31 Reverse, Locks 66 Not Used Continuous Variable Road Sensing Suspension 67 Not Used 32 68 Not Used 33 Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning 69 Not Used 34 Ignition 3 Rear 70 Not Used 35 Antilock Braking System 71 Not Used 36 Heated Seat, Right Front 72 Not Used 37 Heated Seat, Right Rear 73 Not Used 38 Dimmer 74 Not Used 60 Not Used 75 Not Used Relays Usage Relays Usage 39 Fuel Pump 52 Trunk Release 40 Parking Lamps 53 Not Used 41 Ignition 1 54 Lock, Cylinder 42 Not Used 55 Automatic Level Control Compressor 43 Not Used 58 Not Used 44 Park Shift Interlock 59 Rear Defog 45 Reverse Lamps 46 Retained Accessory Power for Sunroof 47 Reverse Lockout 56 Power Seats 48 Suspension Dampers 57 Power Windows 49 Ignition 3 50 Fuel Tank Door Release 51 Interior Lamps Circuit Breakers Usage The spare fuses and fuse puller are located in the underhood fuse block. See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-98. 5-105 Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information. Capacities Application English Metric 2.2 lbs 1.0 kg Cooling System 13.0 quarts 12.3 L Engine Oil with Filter 7.5 quarts 7.1 L Fuel Tank 18.5 gallons 70.0 L Transaxle 15.0 quarts 14.2 L 100 ft lb 140 Y Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a Wheel Nut Torque All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Engine Specifications 5-106 Engine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap 4.6L DOHC V8 Y DeVille, DHS Automatic 0.050 inches (1.3 mm) 4.6L DOHC V8 9 DTS Automatic 0.050 inches (1.3 mm) Section 6 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2 Introduction ...................................................6-2 Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2 Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2 Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4 Additional Required Services ............................6-6 Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7 Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9 At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9 At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9 At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13 Maintenance Record .....................................6-14 6-1 Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended. Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance is important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain your vehicle properly. Using Your Maintenance Schedule Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer for details. Maintenance Requirements Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance may not be covered by warranty. 6-2 We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your GM Goodwrench dealer. This schedule is for vehicles that: • carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on the tire and loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30. • are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits. • use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 should be performed when indicated. See Additional Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information. {CAUTION: Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know-how and the proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have any doubt, see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a qualified technician do the work. Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should have your GM Goodwrench dealer do these jobs. When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your service needs, you will know that GM-trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine GM parts. If you want to purchase service information, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11. Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what should be checked, when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition. The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine GM parts. 6-3 Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset the system. If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally, you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-17 for information on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system. 6-4 When the change engine oil message appears, certain services, checks and inspections are required. Required services are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more often. Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the change engine oil message comes on within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed. Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I. Always use Maintenance II whenever the message comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year. Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter.See Engine Oil on page 5-14. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-17. An Emission Control Service. • • Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • • Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes † and (m). • Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-57. • • Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • • Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed. • • Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in this section. • • Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. • Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). • Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). • 6-5 Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services Service and Miles (Kilometers) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components. Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service. Throttle body service. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes † and (l). Replace seat cushion filter (or every 2 years, whichever occurs first). Replace seatback filter (or every 5 years, whichever occurs first). Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter (severe service). See footnote (h). Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. Except Professional Vehicle: Engine cooling system service (or every 5 years, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). 6-6 25,000 (41 500) • 50,000 (83 000) • 75,000 (125 000) • 100,000 (166 000) • 125,000 (207 500) • 150,000 (240 000) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Additional Required Services (cont’d) Service and Miles (Kilometers) Professional Vehicle Only: Engine cooling system service (or every 5 years, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. 25,000 (41 500) Maintenance Footnotes † The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. (a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. 50,000 (83 000) 75,000 (125 000) • 100,000 (166 000) 125,000 (207 500) 150,000 (240 000) • • (b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. (c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year. (d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. 6-7 (e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.) (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the hood, rear compartment, glove box door and console door. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak. (g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often. (h) If you do not use your vehicle under the following conditions, the fluid and filter do not require change until the CHANGE TRANS FLUID message appears on the Driver Information Center. Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions: − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher. − In hilly or mountainous terrain. − When doing frequent trailer towing. − Professional vehicle uses, such as limousine service. − Uses such as high performance operation. (i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. (j) Check throttle system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise control cables. (k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed. (l) Inspect throttle body bore and valve plates for deposits. Open the throttle valve and inspect all surfaces. Clean as required. (m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. 6-8 Owner Checks and Services Engine Coolant Level Check These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you with these checks and services. Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24 for further details. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further details. Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-57 for further details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire. If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-77. Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to your engine not covered by your warranty. 6-9 At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check {CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31 if necessary. Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service. 6-10 Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control System Check {CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31 if necessary. Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer for service. Ignition Transaxle Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position. • The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift lever is in PARK (P). • The key should come out only in OFF. Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required. Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park (P) Mechanism Check {CAUTION: When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake. • To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. • To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is required. Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect. 6-11 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench Engine Oil oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-14. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable and use only Engine Coolant water DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-24. Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. Windshield GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent. Washer Solvent Usage Fluid/Lubricant Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in Canada Parking Brake 88901242) or lubricant meeting Cable Guides requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in Canada System 89021186). DEXRON®-III Automatic Automatic Transmission Fluid. Look for Transaxle “Approved for the H-Specification” on the label. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube Key Lock (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Cylinders Canada 10953474). Hood Latch Assembly, Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Secondary Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada Latch, Pivots, 992723) or lubricant meeting Spring Anchor requirements of NLGI #2, Category and Release LB or GC-LB. Pawl Lubricant, Superlube Hood and Door Multi-Purpose (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Hinges Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Conditioning 6-12 Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer. Part Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Element Engine Oil Filter Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element Spark Plugs Wiper Blade (Shepherd’s Hook Type) 22 inches (56.5 cm) GM Part Number 25099149 89017342 25689297 12571535 ACDelco® Part Number A1208C PF61 — 41–987 12494780 — 6-13 Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date 6-14 Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-15 Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date 6-16 Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2 Online Owner Center ......................................7-3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users ...............................................7-4 Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5 Roadside Service ...........................................7-5 Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders ..................................................7-9 Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ..............................................7-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ..............................................7-11 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .........................................7-11 Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11 7-1 Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Cadillac Customer Assistance Center, 24 hours a day, by calling 1-800-458-8006. In Canada, contact GM of Canada, Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre by calling 1-888-446–2000. 7-2 We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance Representative: • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield. • Dealership name and location. • Vehicle delivery date and present mileage. When contacting Cadillac, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern. STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you. You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address: BBB Auto Line Program Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc. 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington, VA 22203-1838 Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program. Online Owner Center The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in one place. The Online Owner Center allows you to: • Get e-mail service reminders. • Access information about your specific vehicle, including tips and videos and an electronic version of this owner’s manual (United States only). • Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and maintenance schedule. • Find GM dealers for service nationwide. • Receive special promotions and privileges only available to members (United States only). Refer to the web for updated information. To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com (United States) or My GM Canada within www.gmcanada.com (Canada). 7-3 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Assistance Offices Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to Cadillac, the letter should be addressed to Cadillac’s Customer Assistance Center. United States— Customer Assistance Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 33169 Detroit, MI 48232-5169 1-800-458-8006 1-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112 Fax Number: 313-381-0022 7-4 From Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Fax Number: 313-381-0022 From U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994 Fax Number: 313-381-0022 Canada — Customer Assistance General Motors of Canada Limited Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 1-888-446-2000 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112 Overseas — Customer Assistance Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit. Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and wheelchair/scooter lifts. The offer is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830. Roadside Service Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than an auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac owner with the advantage of contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available, a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide on-site service. Each technician travels with a specially equipped service vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts and tools required to handle most roadside repairs. Cadillac Roadside Service® can be reached by dialing 1-800-882-1112, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. This service is provided at no charge for any warranty-covered situation and for a nominal charge if the Cadillac is no longer under warranty. Roadside Service is available only in the United States and Canada. 7-5 Cadillac Owner Privileges™ Reaching Roadside Service Roadside Service provides several Cadillac Owner Privileges™ at “no charge,” throughout your Cadillac Warranty Period — 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km). Dial the toll-free Roadside Service number: 1-800-882-1112. A Roadside Service Advisor will assist you and request the following information: Emergency Road Service is performed on site for the following situations: • • • • • • Towing Service Battery Jump Starting Lock Out Assistance Fuel Delivery Flat Tire Change (Covers change only) Trip Interruption — If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental expenses may be reimbursed during the 48 months/50,000 miles (80 000 km) warranty period. Items covered are hotel, meals, and rental car. Roadside Service Availability Wherever you drive in the United States or Canada, an advisor is available to assist you over the phone. A dealer technician, if available, can travel to your location within a 30 mile (50 km) radius of a participating Cadillac dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. 7-6 • A description of the problem • Name, home address, home telephone number • Location of your Cadillac and number you are calling from • The model year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), mileage, and date of delivery Roadside Service for the Hearing or Speech Impaired Roadside Service is prepared to assist owners who have hearing difficulties or are speech impaired. Cadillac has installed special telecommunication devices called Text Telephone (TTY) in the Roadside Service Center. Any customer who has access to a (TTY) or a conventional teletypewriter can communicate with Cadillac by dialing from the United States or Canada 1-888-889-2438 — daily, 24 hours. Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Cadillac has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles. Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Cadillac helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following: The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs. Shuttle Service Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions. Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership. Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement of up to a five day maximum may be available for the use of public transportation such as a taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five day maximum may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair. 7-7 Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Information Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $40 a day and must be supported by receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair. Courtesy Transportation is available during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information. Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details. Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel. General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion. 7-8 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only in a crash event by computer systems, such as those commonly called event data recorders (EDR). In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle may record information about the condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such as data related to engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance, and the severity of a collision. This information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants. To read this information, special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required. GM will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than: • with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee, • in response to an official request of police or similar government office, • as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the discovery process, or • as required by law. 7-9 In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may: • use the data for GM research needs, • make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown, or • share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non-GM organizations for research purposes. Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data. If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual for information on its operations and data collection. Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Washington, D.C. 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline. 7-10 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government Service Publications Ordering Information If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to: Service Manuals Transport Canada 330 Sparks Street Tower C Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc. Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases. In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify us. Please call us at 1-800-458-8006, or write: Service Bulletins Cadillac Customer Assistance Center Cadillac Motor Car Division P.O. Box 33169 Detroit, MI 48232-5169 In Canada, please call us at 1– 888– 446–2000. Or, write: Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 General Motors of Canada Limited 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle. In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483). 7-11 Owner’s Information Owner publications are written specifically for owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance Schedule for all models. In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and Warranty Booklet. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only. RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com Or you can write to: Helm, Incorporated P. O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Current and Past Model Order Forms Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery. Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle. Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. 7-12 A Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-28 Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6 Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-97 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-19 Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-30 Airbag Readiness Light .......................................... 3-45 Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9 Airbag System ................................................ 1-45 How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-52 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-54 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-52 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-52 When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-50 Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-48 Antenna, Diversity Antenna System .................. 3-106 Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..................................................... 3-107 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-48 Appearance Care ............................................ 5-87 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-93 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-90 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-94 Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-91 Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-87 Finish Care ................................................. 5-92 Finish Damage ............................................ 5-94 Appearance Care (cont.) Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-90 Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-89 Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-89 Leather ...................................................... 5-89 Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-94 Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-90 Tires .......................................................... 5-94 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-94 Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-95 Vinyl .......................................................... 5-89 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-91 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-90 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-92 Wood Panels .............................................. 5-89 Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-29 Assist Handles ............................................... 2-50 Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-79 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-103 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-104 Care of Your CD Player .............................. 3-106 Care of Your CDs ...................................... 3-106 Diversity Antenna System ............................ 3-106 Glovebox-Mounted CD Changer ..................... 3-99 Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-99 Radio Personalization with Home and Away Feature ................................................. 3-102 Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-87 Radio with CD ............................................ 3-80 1 Audio System(s) (cont.) Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-80 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-80 Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-103 Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-104 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-107 Automatic Transaxle Fluid .......................................................... 5-21 Operation ................................................... 2-28 B Battery .......................................................... 5-40 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... 3-20 Inadvertent Power Saver .............................. 3-23 Load Management ....................................... 3-22 Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22 Brake Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6 Emergencies ................................................ 4-8 Parking ...................................................... 2-31 System Warning and Parking Brake Indicator Light ...................................................... 3-47 Brakes .......................................................... 5-37 Braking ........................................................... 4-5 Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8 2 Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... Bulb Replacement ........................................... Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Parking and Cornering Lamps ...................................... Halogen Bulbs ............................................ Headlamp Aiming ........................................ Headlamps ................................................. Replacement Bulbs ...................................... Buying New Tires ........................................... 2-24 5-51 5-55 5-51 5-48 5-51 5-56 5-71 C California Fuel .................................................. 5-5 Canadian Owners ................................................ ii Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-106 Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-12, 2-35, 4-25, 4-37 Care of Safety Belts ................................................ 5-90 Your Cassette Tape Player .......................... 3-104 Your CD Player ......................................... 3-106 Your CDs ................................................. 3-106 CD Changer, Glovebox-Mounted ....................... 3-99 Cellular Telephone, Storage Area ...................... 2-48 Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-49 Center Flex Storage Unit ................................. 2-50 Center Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....... 1-19 Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-75 Charging System Light .................................... 3-46 Check Engine Light ............................................... Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... Child Restraints Child Restraint Systems ............................... Infants and Young Children ........................... Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) .......................... Older Children ............................................. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ........................................ Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position .................................................. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position ........................................... Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position ........................................... Top Strap ................................................... Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ Where to Put the Restraint ........................... Cigarette Lighter ............................................. Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. Fabric/Carpet .............................................. Finish Care ................................................. Glass Surfaces ............................................ Instrument Panel ......................................... Interior Plastic Components ........................... 3-50 5-10 5-94 1-31 1-28 1-37 1-26 1-39 1-40 1-42 1-42 1-35 1-37 1-34 3-29 5-93 5-91 5-87 5-92 5-90 5-89 5-89 Cleaning (cont.) Leather ...................................................... 5-89 Speaker Covers .......................................... 5-90 Tires .......................................................... 5-94 Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-94 Vinyl .......................................................... 5-89 Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-91 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-90 Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-92 Wood Panels .............................................. 5-89 Climate Control System Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-36 Climate Controls Personalization .................... 3-39 Dual .......................................................... 3-30 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-34 Rear .......................................................... 3-35 Steering Wheel Controls ............................... 3-38 Comfort Controls, DIC Personalization ................ 3-68 Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-23 Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-86 Continuous Variable Road Sensing Suspension (CVRSS) ................................... 4-10 Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5 Convenience Net ............................................ 2-51 Coolant Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-49 Engine Temperature Warning Light ................. 3-49 Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-27 Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-27 Cooled Seats ................................................... 1-3 3 Cooling System .............................................. 5-30 Cornering Lamps ............................................ 3-18 Courtesy Lamps ............................................. 3-21 Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-12 Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-54 Customer Assistance Information Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users ....................................................... 7-4 Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-11 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government ............................................ 7-11 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government ............................................ 7-10 Roadside Service .......................................... 7-5 Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11 D Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16 Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2 Diversity Antenna System ............................... 3-106 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4 4 Door Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-9 Locks .......................................................... 2-8 Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10 Driver Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-12 Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-57 Climate Controls and Radio System Personalization ........................................ 3-68 DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-57 DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-68 DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-60 Driving At Night ..................................................... 4-16 City ........................................................... 4-20 Defensive ..................................................... 4-2 Drunken ....................................................... 4-2 Freeway ..................................................... 4-21 Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-23 In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-30 Winter ........................................................ 4-25 Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-30 E F Electrical System Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-97 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98 Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-97 Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-97 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-101 Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-98 Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-97 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-19 Battery ....................................................... 5-40 Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-50 Coolant ...................................................... 5-24 Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-27 Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-49 Coolant Temperature Warning Light ................ 3-49 Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12 Exhaust ..................................................... 2-35 Oil ............................................................. 5-14 Overheated Protection Operating Mode ........... 5-29 Overheating ................................................ 5-27 Speed Limiter ............................................. 3-44 Starting ...................................................... 2-26 Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-21 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9 Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-25 Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-15 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .......................... 3-20 Filter Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-19 Finish Damage ............................................... 5-94 Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9 Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-76 Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-77 Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-85 Fluid Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-21 Power Steering ........................................... 5-35 Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36 Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-54 Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-18 Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-49 Fuel ............................................................... 5-5 Additives ...................................................... 5-6 California Fuel .............................................. 5-5 Data Display ............................................... 3-56 Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10 Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7 Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6 Gage ......................................................... 3-55 Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5 Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5 Full Floor Console Storage Area ....................... 2-49 5 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-98 Rear Underseat Fuse Block ......................... 5-101 Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-98 Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-97 G Gage Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-49 Fuel .......................................................... 3-55 Speedometer .............................................. 3-43 Tachometer ................................................. 3-44 Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-44 Gasoline Octane ........................................................ 5-5 Specifications ............................................... 5-5 Glove Box ..................................................... 2-48 Glovebox-Mounted CD Changer ........................ 3-99 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5 H Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6 Headlamp Aiming ....................................................... 5-48 Horizontal Aiming ......................................... 5-49 Vertical Aiming ............................................ 5-50 6 Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-97 Headlamps .................................................... 5-51 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-51 Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-16 Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker, Parking and Cornering Lamps ...................................... 5-55 Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-51 High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9 On Reminder .............................................. 3-16 Wiper Activated ........................................... 3-16 Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3 Heated Steering Wheel ..................................... 3-7 Heater ........................................................... 3-30 Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-54 Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23 Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-23 HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-44 HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-45 Hood Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10 Release ..................................................... 5-11 Horn ............................................................... 3-6 How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-12 I Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-24 Inadvertent Power Battery Saver ....................... 3-23 Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-28 Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-65 Instrument Panel Brightness .................................................. 3-20 Cluster ....................................................... 3-41 Overview ..................................................... 3-4 Storage Area .............................................. 2-48 J Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42 K Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5 Keys ............................................................... 2-3 L Labelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... Lamps Battery Load Management ............................ Cornering ................................................... Courtesy .................................................... 5-58 3-22 3-18 3-21 Lamps (cont.) Exterior ...................................................... Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ...................... Fog ........................................................... Inadvertent Power Battery Saver .................... Reading ..................................................... Twilight Sentinel® ........................................ LATCH System Child Restraints ........................................... Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System ........................................ Light Airbag Readiness ........................................ Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... Brake System Warning and Parking Brake Indicator ................................................. Charging System ......................................... Cruise Control ............................................. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. Fog Lamp .................................................. Highbeam On ............................................. Lights On Reminder ..................................... Malfunction Indicator .................................... Oil Pressure ............................................... Safety Belt Reminder ................................... Security ..................................................... TCS Warning Light ...................................... Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-15 3-20 3-18 3-23 3-22 3-18 1-37 1-39 3-45 3-48 3-47 3-46 3-54 3-49 3-54 3-54 3-54 3-50 3-53 3-45 3-53 3-48 3-48 7 Lighting Entry ......................................................... 3-21 Parade Dimming .......................................... 3-21 Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11 Locks Central Door Unlocking System ....................... 2-9 Door ........................................................... 2-8 Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11 Power Door .................................................. 2-9 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10 Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14 Lumbar Massaging Controls ....................................... 1-3 Power Controls ............................................. 1-2 Lumbar Controls, Rear Power ............................ 1-6 M Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6 At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9 At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9 At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10 Introduction .................................................. 6-2 Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7 Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14 8 Maintenance Schedule (cont.) Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13 Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4 Using Your ................................................... 6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2 Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-50 Map Pocket ................................................... 2-50 Massaging Lumbar Controls ............................... 1-3 Memory Mirrors .............................................. 2-52 Memory Seat ................................................. 2-52 Memory Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 2-52 Message DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-60 Mirrors Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® ....... 2-37 Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar® and Compass .......................................... 2-37 Memory ..................................................... 2-52 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-41 Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-41 Outside Curb View Assist Mirror .................... 2-41 Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-41 Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-40 MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3 N Navigation/Radio System .................................. New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... Night Vision System ........................................ Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 3-99 2-24 3-23 6-13 O Odometer ...................................................... 3-43 Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-43 Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12 Oil Engine ....................................................... 5-14 Life Indicator ............................................... 3-79 Pressure Light ............................................. 3-53 Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-26 Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3 OnStar® System ............................................. 2-42 Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6 Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-34 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-41 Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-41 Curb View Assist Mirror ................................ 2-41 Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-41 Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-40 Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-29 Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9 Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii P Parade Dimming ............................................. 3-21 Park Aid ........................................................ 3-26 Park (P) Shifting Into ................................................ 2-32 Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-34 Parking Assist ........................................................ 3-26 Brake ........................................................ 2-31 Brake Indicator Light .................................... 3-47 Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-35 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-36 Passing ......................................................... 4-13 PASS-Key® III ................................................ 2-21 PASS-Key® III Operation .................................. 2-22 Performance Shifting ....................................... 2-31 Personalization, Climate Controls ...................... 3-39 Power Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-28 Door Locks .................................................. 2-9 Electrical System ......................................... 5-97 Inadvertent Battery Saver ............................. 3-23 9 Power (cont.) Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-2 Rear Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-6 Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-25 Seat ............................................................ 1-2 Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35 Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ....... 3-7 Windows .................................................... 2-16 Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-25 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10 Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-45 Q Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-11 R Radios .......................................................... 3-79 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-104 Care of Your CD Player .............................. 3-106 Care of Your CDs ...................................... 3-106 DIC Personalization ..................................... 3-68 Glovebox-Mounted CD Changer ..................... 3-99 Navigation/Radio System .............................. 3-99 Radio Personalization with Home and Away Feature ................................................. 3-102 Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-87 Radio with CD ............................................ 3-80 10 Radios (cont.) Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-80 Setting the Time for Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-80 Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-103 Understanding Reception ............................ 3-104 Rainsense™ II Wipers ..................................... 3-10 Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-22 Rear Climate Control System ............................ 3-35 Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10 Rear Heated Seats ........................................... 1-5 Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-23 Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-20 Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-51 Rear Storage Door Trim Armrest ....................... 2-51 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with OnStar® ..................................................... 2-37 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with OnStar® and Compass ................................. 2-37 Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12 Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-35 Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5 Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-6 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire .................................................. 5-80 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-78 Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-56 Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government .................................. 7-11 General Motors ........................................... 7-11 United States Government ............................ 7-10 Restraint System Check Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-54 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash .................................................. 1-55 Restraint Systems Checking .................................................... 1-54 Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-55 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-25 Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-19 Roadside Service ........................................................ 7-5 Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-30 Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-36 S Safety Belt Pretensioners .............................................. Reminder Light ............................................ Safety Belts Care of ...................................................... Center Front Passenger Position .................... Driver Position ............................................ How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-25 3-45 5-90 1-19 1-12 1-12 1-11 Safety Belts (cont.) Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults ...................................... 1-23 Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-20 Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-19 Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-25 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-18 Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-7 Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4 Seats Heated and Cooled Seats .............................. 1-3 Heated Seats, Rear ....................................... 1-5 Massaging Lumbar ........................................ 1-3 Memory ..................................................... 2-52 Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-2 Power Lumbar, Rear ...................................... 1-6 Power Seats ................................................. 1-2 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4 Securing a Child Restraint Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-42 Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-39 Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-40 Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-42 Security Light ................................................. 3-53 Service ........................................................... 5-3 Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5 Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4 11 Service (cont.) Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-50 Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11 Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-54 Setting the Time Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......... 3-80 Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ..... 3-80 Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-94 Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-32 Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-34 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8 Spare Tire Installing .................................................... 5-80 Removing ................................................... 5-78 Storing ....................................................... 5-85 Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-106 Speedometer .................................................. 3-43 Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-26 Steering ........................................................ 4-10 Steering Wheel Comfort Controls ...................... 3-38 Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-103 Steering Wheel Controls, Memory ..................... 2-52 Steering Wheel, Heated ..................................... 3-7 Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column ........................................... 3-7 Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6 Storage Areas Cellular Telephone ....................................... 2-48 Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-49 Center Flex Storage Unit .............................. 2-50 12 Storage Areas (cont.) Convenience Net ......................................... Front Storage Area ...................................... Full Floor Console Storage Area .................... Glove Box .................................................. Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... Map Pocket ................................................ Rear Storage Area ....................................... Rear Storage Door Trim Armrest .................... Umbrella Holder .......................................... Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... Sun Visors ..................................................... Sunroof ......................................................... 2-51 2-49 2-49 2-48 2-48 2-50 2-51 2-51 2-51 4-29 2-18 2-51 T Tachometer .................................................... 3-44 TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-48 Telescopic Steering Column, Power Tilt Wheel ...... 3-7 Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-103 Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-19 PASS-Key® III ............................................. 2-21 PASS-Key® III Operation .............................. 2-22 Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6 Tires ............................................................. 5-57 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels, Cleaning ................................................. 5-93 Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-71 Chains ....................................................... 5-75 Tires (cont.) Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-77 Cleaning .................................................... 5-94 Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-86 If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-76 Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-65 Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-69 Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-80 Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-68 Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-80 Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-78 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-85 Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-58 Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-62 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-72 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-73 Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-73 When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-70 Top Strap ...................................................... 1-35 Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-37 Towing Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-35 Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-37 Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-35 Traction Continuous Variable Road Sensing Suspension (CVRSS) ................................................. 4-10 Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-8 Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-48 Transaxle Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21 Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-28 Trip Computer Oil Life Indicator .......................................... 3-79 Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-43 Trunk ............................................................ 2-12 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8 Twilight Sentinel® ............................................ 3-18 U Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............... 3-26 Umbrella Holder .............................................. 2-51 Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-104 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-72 V Valet Lockout Switch ....................................... 2-21 Vehicle Control ........................................................ 4-5 Damage Warnings ........................................... iv Symbols ......................................................... iv Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders .................................................... 7-9 13 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................................. Service Parts Identification Label ................... Vehicle Personalization DIC ........................................................... Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ...... Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... Visors ........................................................... 5-96 5-96 3-68 2-52 3-34 2-18 W Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-40 Warnings DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-60 Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6 Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6 Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-73 Replacement ............................................... 5-73 Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-34 14 Windows ....................................................... 2-15 Power ........................................................ 2-16 Windshield Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-92 Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-11 Fluid .......................................................... 5-36 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-56 Fuses ........................................................ 5-97 Rainsense™ II Wipers .................................. 3-10 Windshield Wipers ......................................... 3-9 Winter Driving ................................................ 4-25 Wiper Activated Headlamps .............................. 3-16 X XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-107 Y Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2